Owners Manual

V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:19:58+01:00; Page 1 henrikrosenqvist

OwnersVOLVO V70 & XC70Manual

Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&%%*(:c\a^h]!6I%-'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<iZWdg\'%%-!8deng^\]i'%%%"'%%-Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 1 henrikrosenqvist

DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements. In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 2 henrikrosenqvist

Table of contents

00 Introduction 01 Safety 02 Locks and alarm Important information ...... 6 Seatbelts ...... 14 Remote control key/key blade ...... 40 Volvo and the environment ...... 9 Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) ...... 17 Privacy locking*...... 45 Activating/deactivating the airbag* ...... 20 Battery replacement, remote control key/ Side airbags (SIPS bags) ...... 22 PCC* ...... 46 Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...... 24 Keyless drive*...... 48 WHIPS ...... 25 Locking/unlocking ...... 50 When the systems deploy ...... 27 Child safety locks ...... 55 Safety mode ...... 28 Alarm*...... 56 00 Child sa0fety ...... 1...... 29 02

2 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 3 henrikrosenqvist

Table of contents

03 Your driving environment 04 Comfort and driving pleasure 05 During your journey Instruments and controls ...... 62 Menus and messages ...... 118 Recommendations during driving ...... 200 Key positions ...... 71 Climate control ...... 123 Refuelling ...... 202 Seats ...... 72 Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- Fuel ...... 203 Steering wheel ...... 76 senger compartment heater* ...... 131 Loading ...... 206 Lighting ...... 77 Fuel-driven additional heater* ...... 134 Cargo area ...... 209 Wipers and washing...... 86 Audio system ...... 135 Warning triangle* ...... 213 Windows, rearview and door mirrors ...... 89 RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Driving with a trailer ...... 214 Dual Screen* ...... 147 Power sunroof* ...... 93 Towing and recovery ...... 219 Trip computer ...... 152 Starting the engine ...... 95 Compass* ...... 154 Starting the engine – Flexifuel ...... 97 DSTC – Stability and traction control sys- Starting the engine – external battery ...... 99 tem ...... 155 Gearboxes...... 100 Adapting driving characteristics ...... 156 All-wheel drive – AWD* ...... 104 Cruise control* ...... 157 Foot brake ...... 105 Adaptive cruise control* ...... 158 Hill Descent Control (HDC) ...... 107 Distance Alert ...... 164 Parkin0g brake ...... 3 ...... 109 Col0lision Warning with 4Auto Brake* ...... 167 05 HomeLink EU* ...... 112 Driver Alert System – DAC* ...... 172 Driver Alert System - LDW* ...... 175 Park Assist* ...... 178 BLIS* – Blind Spot Information System .. 181 Comfort inside the passenger compartment ...... 185 Bluetooth handsfree* ...... 188 Built-in phone* ...... 193

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 3 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 4 henrikrosenqvist

Table of contents

06 Maintenance and 07 Alphabetical Index specifications Alphabetical Index ...... 283 Engine compartment...... 224 Lamps ...... 229 Wiper blades and washer fluid...... 236 Battery...... 238 Fuses...... 241 Wheels and tyres ...... 249 Car care ...... 263 Type designations ...... 267 Specifications ...... 269 Type0approval ...... 6 ...... 282 07

4 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 5 henrikrosenqvist

Table of contents

5 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 6 henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Important information

Reading the Owner's Manual Option Footnote All types of option/accessory are marked with There is footnote information in the owner's Introduction an asterisk . manual that is located at the bottom of the A good way of getting to know your new car is page. This information is an addition to the text to read the owner's manual, ideally before your The range of options/accessories for the dif- that it refers to via a number. If the footnote first journey. This will give you the opportunity ferent car models varies depending on the mar- refers to text in a table then letters are used to familiarise yourself with new functions, to ket. The majority of options are factory fitted instead of numbers for referral. see how best to handle the car in different sit- and cannot be retrofitted, accessories are ret- uations, and to make the best use of all the rofitted. Message texts car's features. Please pay attention to the Contact your authorised Volvo dealer for more There are displays in the car that show text safety instructions contained in the manual. information. messages. These text messages are high- The equipment described in the owner's man- lighted in the owner's manual by means of the ual is not present in all cars. In addition to Special texts text being slightly larger and printed in grey. standard equipment, this manual also Examples of this are in menu texts and mes- describes options (factory fitted equipment) WARNING sage texts on the information display (e.g. Audio settings ). and certain accessories (retrofitted extra Warning texts advise of a risk of personal equipment). If you are uncertain over what is injury. Decals standard or option/accessory then contact The car contains different types of decal which your Volvo dealer. IMPORTANT are designed to convey important information Volvo cars are adapted for the varying require- in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the ments of different markets, as well as for Important texts advise of a risk of material car have the following descending degree of national or local legal requirements and regu- damage. importance for the warning/information. lations. The specifications, design features and illus- NOTE trations in this owner's manual are not binding. NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate We reserve the right to make modifications the use of features and functions for exam- without prior notice. ple. © Volvo Car Corporation

6 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 7 henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Important information

Warning for personal injury Risk of property damage Information

G031596 G031597 G031600

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, White ISO symbols and white text/image on White ISO symbols and white text/image on white text/image on black message field. Used black or blue warning field and message field. black message field. to indicate the presence of danger which, if the Used to indicate the presence of danger which, warning is ignored, may result in serious per- if the warning is ignored, may result in damage Procedure lists sonal injury or fatality. to property. Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual. When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration. There are numbered lists with letters adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant. Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a movement.

7 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 8 henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Important information

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- Recording data Accessories and extra equipment step instructions then the different steps are One or more of the computers in your Volvo are The incorrect connection and installation of numbered with normal numbers. capable of recording detailed information. This accessories can negatively affect the car's information is intended for use in research to electrical system. Certain accessories only Position lists enhance safety and for diagnosing faults in function when their associated software is Red circles containing a number are used some of the in-car systems. The data may installed in the car's computer system. Always in overview images where different com- include details regarding seatbelt use by the contact an authorised Volvo workshop before ponents are pointed out. The number driver and passengers, the functions of various installing accessories which are connected to recurs in the position list featured in con- vehicle systems and modules, and status infor- or affect the electrical system. nection with the illustration that describes mation about the engine, throttle, steering, the item. brakes and other systems. This data can also Information on the Internet Bulleted lists include details of the way the car is driven. This type of information can include, without being At www.volvocars.com there is further infor- A bulleted list is used when there is a list of mation concerning your car. points in the owner's manual. limited to, specific details such as vehicle speed, the use of the brake and accelerator Example: pedals and steering wheel position. This latter • Coolant type of data can be stored for a limited period while the car is being driven and subsequently • Engine oil during a collision or a near-collision. Volvo Car To be continued Corporation will not disclose the stored infor-

mation without consent. However, Volvo Car `

`` This symbol is located furthest down to the right when a section continues on the next Corporation may be forced to disclose the double-page spread. information due to national legislation. Volvo Car Corporation and its authorised workshops may also read and use the information.

8 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 9 henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy 0 0 0 0 0 0 G

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- EPI (Environmental Product Information) is Efficient emission control ration's core values which influence all opera- supplied for all Volvo models. Here you can see Your Volvo is manufactured following the con- tions. We also believe that our customers share how the environment is affected during the cept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that our consideration for the environment. entire lifecycle of the car. encompasses a clean interior environment as Your Volvo complies with strict international Read more at www.volvocars.com/EPI. well as highly efficient emission control. In environmental standards and is also manufac- many cases the exhaust emissions are well tured in one of the cleanest and most resource- Fuel consumption below the applicable standards. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo- Clean air in the passenger compartment ration has global ISO certification, which in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel A passenger compartment filter prevents dust includes the environmental standard ISO consumption generally results in lower emis- and pollen from entering the passenger com- 14001 covering all factories and several of our sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide. partment via the air intake. other units. We also set requirements for our It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con- partners so that they work systematically with sumption. For more information read under the A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS * (Inte- environmental issues. heading, Reducing environmental impact . rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom-

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 9 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 10 henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic Volvo workshops and the environment • Remove unnecessary items from the car. outside. Regular maintenance creates the conditions The greater the load the higher the fuel consumption. The system consists of an electronic sensor for a long service life and low fuel consumption and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni- for your car. In this way you contribute to a • If the car is equipped with an engine block tored continuously and if there is an increase cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops heater, always use it before starting from in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as are entrusted with the service and mainte- cold. This reduces fuel consumption and carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. nance of your car it becomes part of our sys- exhaust emissions. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, tem. We make clear demands regarding the • Drive gently and avoid braking too hard. way in which our workshops are designed in queues and tunnels for example. Drive in the highest gear possible. Low order to prevent spills and discharges into the • The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone engine speeds result in lower fuel con- environment. Our workshop staff have the sumption. and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon knowledge and the tools required to guarantee filter. good environmental care. • Use engine braking to slow down. • Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention Textile standard Reducing environmental impact to local regulations. Switch off the engine The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- You can easily help reduce environmental when stationary for longer periods. sant and comfortable, even for people with impact, for example, by driving economically Always dispose of environmentally hazar- contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. • and by servicing and maintaining the car dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in Extreme attention has been given to choosing according to the instructions in the owner's an environmentally safe manner. If uncer- environmentally-compatible materials. This manual. tain about disposal, consult an authorised means that they also fulfil the requirements in Volvo workshop for advice. the Oeko-Tex 100 standard 1, a major advance The following advice will help you to do your bit towards a healthier passenger compartment for the environment: (for further advice on how • Service your car regularly. environment. you can reduce environmental impact and • High speed increases consumption con- drive economically, see pages 262, 200). siderably due to increased wind resis- Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car- Decrease fuel consumption by choosing tance. A doubling of speed increases wind pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the • ECO tyre pressure, see page 262. resistance 4 times. upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning with plant substances and fulfils the certifica- • A roof load and ski box increase air resis- These hints will help reduce fuel consumption tion requirements. tance, leading to higher fuel consumption. without increasing travel time or lessening the Remove them directly after use. enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to

1 More information on www.oekotex.com

10 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 11 henrikrosenqvist

Introduction

Volvo and the environment your car, you'll be saving money - and the Earth's resources.

11 12 h V enrikosqv 70/XC * O ptio n/ac (Y285/ es S A A S Infl S W W Chi st ide c irbag e a ory H h Y381); ti atbel fet atb en ld I vat , PS for airb y sa t ing/dea mo he sy le m . . fet s 9; ags ...... ore stem Curta ...... de syt y 3 ...... informat ...... (S ems ctiv ( IPS in SR . . . . (IC) ati . . . on, depl bags) . . . . . ng - ...... s Ai e ...... oy the . . . . . rbag . . Introduc ...... ai ...... ) *rbag ...... ion...... 24 . .. . 20 17 14 2 27 29 25 28 208-35T:16 38+01: 0; Page 12

G02087 1 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 13 henrikrosenqvist

SAFETY 01 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 14 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 Seatbelts

General information Releasing the seatbelt WARNING Press the red lock button and then let the seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, Each seatbelt is designed for only one person. feed the seatbelt in by hand so that it does not hang loose. The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn: WARNING • if it is pulled out too quickly. Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo work- • during braking and acceleration. shop. • if the car leans heavily. If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major 5

9 load, such as in conjunction with a collision, 9 0

2 Keep in mind the following: 0

G the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some • do not use clips or anything else that can of the protective characteristics of the seat- prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly. belt may have been lost, even if it appears Heavy braking can have serious consequences ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or to be undamaged. In addition, replace the if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all • caught on anything. seatbelt if the belt is worn or damaged. The passengers use their seatbelts. new seatbelt must be type-approved and • the hip strap must be positioned low down intended for installation in the same position It is important that the seatbelt lies against the (not over the abdomen). as the replaced seatbelt. body so it can provide maximum protection. tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling Do not lean the backrest too far back. The • the diagonal shoulder belt as in the pre- seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal ceding illustration. seating position. Putting on a seatbelt WARNING Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud "click" belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this indicates that the seatbelt has locked. may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. The buckles only fit the intended lock in the rear seat*.

14 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 15 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

Seatbelts and pregnancy tion the seat with as large a distance as possi- • Provides information on which seatbelts ble between their abdomen and the steering are being used in the rear seat. The mes- wheel. sage is shown in the information display when the seatbelts are being used or when a rear door is opened. The message is Seatbelt reminder automatically cleared after approx. 30 seconds or can be acknowledged manually by pressing the direction indicator lever's READ button. • Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during travel. This 8 9

9 warning takes the form of a message on 0 2 0 G the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning stops The seatbelt should always be worn during when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can also be acknowledged manually by press- pregnancy. But it is then crucial that it be worn 6 2 7 7 1

0 ing the READ button.

in the correct way. The diagonal section should G wrap over the shoulder then be routed between The message on the information display show- the breasts and to the side of the abdomen. Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail- The lap section should lay flat over the thighs their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual able. Press the READ button to see stored and as low as possible under the abdomen. – reminder. The audio reminder is speed messages. It must never be allowed to ride upward. dependent, and in some cases time depend- Certain markets Remove all slack from the seatbelt and ensure ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind that it fits close to the body. In addition, check console and the combined instrument panel. the driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. that there are no twists in the seatbelt. Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt At low speed, the audio reminder will sound for As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers reminder system. the first 6 seconds. should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the Rear seat vehicle as they drive (which means that they The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two must be able to easily operate the foot pedals subfunctions: and steering wheel). They should strive to posi-

15 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 16 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 Seatbelts

Seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts are equipped with belt ten- sioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then provides more effective restraint for the occupants.

16 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 17 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) 01

Warning symbol on the combined WARNING Overview, airbag system instrument panel If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or another fault in the SRS system. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately. 0 1 o

As well as the warning symbol, a message may 5 6 6 8

appear on the information display in appropri- 1 0 0 G 1 0 1

2 ate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions, 0 G the warning triangle illuminates and SRS SRS system, left-hand drive. airbag Service required or SRS Airbag The airbag system is continuously monitored Service urgent appears in the display. Con- by the system's control module. The warning tact an authorised Volvo workshop immedi- symbol in the combined instrument panel illu- ately. minates when the remote control key is in position II or III . The symbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds provided the airbag system is fault- free. 6 6 6 8 1 0 G

SRS system, right-hand drive. The SRS system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot

17 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 18 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 Airbag system (SRS - Airbag)

gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates Airbag on the driver's side when compressed. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.

WARNING Repairs must only be performed by an 3

authorised Volvo workshop. Any interfer- 1 0 1 2 0

ence in the airbag system could cause mal- G 1 1 0 1

function and result in serious personal 2 0 injury. Location of the front passenger airbag in a left- G hand drive car. The car has an SRS airbag (Supplemental NOTE Restraint System) on the driver's side to sup- The sensors react differently depending on plement the protection afforded by the seat- the course of the collision and whether or belt. This airbag is fitted into the centre of the not the seatbelts on the driver and passen- steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked ger side are used. SRS AIRBAG . It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- WARNING sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this 4

ingly so that one or more airbags are 1 0 1

2 may diminish the protection provided by the 0

deployed. G airbag in the event of a collision. The capacity of the airbags is also adapted to the collision force to which the vehicle is Location of the front passenger airbag in a right- hand drive car. subjected.

18 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 19 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Airbag system (SRS - Airbag) 01

Passenger airbag WARNING Label Airbag Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located.

WARNING Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated 1. 4 7 4 3 Never allow a child to stand or sit in front of 2 8 2 1 3 2 0 0 G

G the front passenger seat. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. Label for airbag located on door pillar. The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen- Failure to follow the advice given above ger side. This airbag is folded up into a could endanger the life of the child. compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked SRS AIRBAG .

WARNING To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

1 For information on how to activate/deactivate the airbag, see page 20

19 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 20 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 Activating/deactivating the airbag *

Key switch off - PACOS WARNING Activating/deactivating General information If the car is equipped with a front passenger The airbag for the front passenger seat can be airbag, but has no switch (PACOS, Passen- deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, ger Airbag Cut Off Switch), then the airbag is always activated. PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For information on how to activate/deactivate, see under the heading Activating/deactivating. WARNING Key switch off/switch Never place a child in a child seat or on a The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag 0

is located on the passenger end of the instru- 3 is activated and the symbol in the 0 9 1 0 ment panel and is accessible when the pas- roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow G senger door is open, (see under the following this advice could endanger the life of the heading, "Switch – PACOS"). Check that the child. Switch location. switch is in the required position. Volvo rec- The airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, persons taller than 140 cm ommends that the remote control key's key WARNING blade be used to change position. can sit in the front passenger seat, but Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- never children in a child seat or on a For information on the key blade, see senger seat if the message in the roof panel booster cushion. page 43. (see page 21) indicates that the airbag is The airbag is deactivated. With the switch deactivated and if the warning symbol for WARNING the airbag system is also displayed in the in this position, children in a child seat or combined instrument panel. This indicates on a booster cushion can sit in the front Failure to follow the advice given above that there has been a severe malfunction. passenger seat, but never persons taller could endanger the life of passengers in the Contact an authorised Volvo workshop than 140 cm. car. immediately.

20 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 21 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag * 01

WARNING A text message and a symbol in the roof panel NOTE indicate that the airbag for the front passenger Activated airbag (passenger seat): seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration). When the remote control key is turned to ignition position II or III the warning symbol Never place a child in a child seat or on a for the airbag is shown in the combined booster cushion on the front passenger seat instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds ( see when the airbag is activated. This applies to page 17). everyone shorter than 140 cm. Following which, the indicator in the roof Deactivated airbag (passenger seat): console is illuminated showing the correct No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in status for the front passenger seat airbag. the front passenger seat when the airbag is For more information on the remote control deactivated. key's different ignition positions, see page 71. Failure to follow the advice given above could endanger life. 0 0 8 7 1 0 G Messages Indicator in the roof console showing that the passenger airbag is activated. A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates

2 that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).

2 4 2 7 7 1 0 G

Indicator in the roof console showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 21 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 22 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 Side airbags (SIPS bags)

Side airbag WARNING Location • Repairs must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Any interference in the SIPS bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. • Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag. 7 4 7 9 3 6 4 0 Use only seat covers approved by 2 2

• 0 0 G G Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags. Driver's seat, left-hand drive. In a side impact collision a large proportion of • The side airbag is a supplement to the the collision force is transferred by the SIPS seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- Child seats and side airbags er's and front passenger seats protect the The protection provided by the car to children chest area and the hip and are an important seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion part of the SIPS. is not diminished by the side airbag. The SIPS bag system consists of two main A child seat or booster cushion can be placed components, side airbag and sensors. The on the front passenger seat provided that the

1 8 7

car does not have an activated passenger 3

side airbags are located in the front seat backr- 4 2 0 ests. airbag. G Front passenger seat, left-hand drive. The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips

1 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag, see page 20.

22 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 23 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01 the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision. Label 4 5 2 2 3 0 G

Label for side airbag located on door pillar.

23 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 24 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 Inflatable Curtain (IC)

Properties WARNING Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example). Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas. 5 7 6 7 1 0 G WARNING The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under supplement to the SIPS and SRS airbags. It is the top edge of the side windows. Other- fitted in the headlining along both sides of the wise, the intended protection of the inflat- roof and protects the car's outer seats. A suf- able curtain, which is concealed in the ficiently violent collision trips the sensors and headlining, may be compromised. the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passen- WARNING gers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision. The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

24 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 25 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

Protection against whiplash injury – The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con- Correct seating position WHIPS sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe- For the best possible protection, the driver and cially designed head restraints in the front front seat passenger should sit in the centre of seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end the seat with as little space as possible collision, where the angle and speed of the col- between the head and the head restraint. lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence. WARNING If a seat has been subjected to extreme WARNING forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, The WHIPS system is a supplement to the the WHIPS system must be checked by an seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. authorised Volvo workshop. Part of the WHIPS system's protective Properties of the seat capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Contact an When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- seat backrests are lowered backward to alter tem checked even after a minor rear-end the seating position of the driver and front seat collision. passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.

WARNING Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS system and child seats/cushions The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system. 8 1 0 1 2 0 G

25 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 26 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 WHIPS

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system 7 6 5 8 1 0 2 G 4 8 1 2 0 G Objects in the rear seat. Objects behind driver's/passenger seat. WARNING WARNING If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the Do not squeeze rigid objects between the corresponding front seat must be moved rear seat cushion and the front seat back- forward so that it does not touch the folded rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the backrest. function of the WHIPS system.

26 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 27 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

When the systems deploy 01

When the systems deploy • Have the car transported to an authorised WARNING Volvo workshop. Do not drive with System Triggered deployed airbags. Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety Seatbelt tensioner, In a frontal collision • Let an authorised Volvo workshop replace systems may also be damaged. The smoke front seat and or side-impact components in the car's safety system. and dust created when the airbags are accident and or • Always contact a doctor. deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ rear-end collision injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid NOTE Seatbelt tensioner, In a frontal collision deployment sequence and airbag fabric rear seat The SRS, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- may cause friction and skin burns. tems are deployed only once during a colli- Airbags (SRS) In a frontal collision. sion A

Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact WARNING A accident The airbag control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact drenched with water or other liquid, discon- accident A nect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Whiplash protection In a rear-end colli- Have the car transported to an authorised WHIPS sion Volvo workshop.

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended:

27 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 28 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 Safety mode

Reduced functionality reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to WARNING start the car. If the message Safety mode See manual is still shown on the display then the If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported to an author- car must not be driven or towed, but a vehicle ised Volvo workshop. recovery service used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving. Moving the car If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode 2 6

0 See manual has been reset, the car can be 1 2 0 G moved carefully out of a dangerous position. Do not move the car further than necessary. If the car is involved in a collision, the text Safety mode See manual may appear on the WARNING information display. This means that the car Never attempt to repair your car or reset the has reduced functionality. Safety mode is a electronics yourself if the car has been in protective state that is enforced when the col- safety mode. This could result in personal lision may have damaged any of the car's vital injury or the car not functioning as normal. functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for Always allow an authorised Volvo workshop one of the safety systems, or the brake system. to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See manual has Attempting to start the car been displayed. First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either. WARNING If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the may attempt to start the car. Safety mode message is displayed. Leave Firstly, remove the remote control key and then the car at once. reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to

28 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 29 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety 01

Children should sit comfortably and Child seats passenger airbag, or where the airbag is deac- safely tivated. The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight Location of child seats and size, for more information, see page 30. You may place: NOTE • a child seat/booster cushion on the passenger seat, provided the passenger air- Regulations regarding the placement of bag is not activated 1. children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply. • a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat that uses the passenger seat backrest as sup- 9 3 7 0

2 port. 0 Children of all ages and sizes must always sit G Always place a child in the rear seat if the pas- correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child Child seats and airbags are not compatible. senger airbag is activated. A child sitting on the to sit on the knee of a passenger. Volvo has child safety products that are front passenger seat could suffer serious injury Volvo's own child safety equipment is designed for and tested by Volvo. if the airbag deploys. designed for your car. Use Volvo genuine equipment to best ensure that the mounting NOTE WARNING points and attachments are correctly positioned and are sufficiently strong. When using child safety products it is Never place a child in a child seat or on a important to read the installation instruc- booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated. NOTE tions included. No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit In the event of questions when fitting child Do not attach the straps for the child seat to in the front passenger seat if the airbag safety products, contact the manufacturer (SRS) is activated. for clearer instructions. the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam- Failure to follow the advice given above age the straps. could endanger the life of the child. Allow the back of the child seat to rest against the dashboard. This applies to cars without a

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 20. ``

29 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 30 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 Child safety

WARNING Label Airbag Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally. Do not allow the upper section of the child Label located on instrument panel end face on the seat to rest against the windscreen. passenger side.

Recommended child seats 2 Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat Group 0 Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, max 10 kg and straps. straps and support legs. (0 – 9 months) Type approval: E5 03135 Type approval: E5 03135 Group 0+ Britax Baby Safe Plus – rear-facing Britax Baby Safe Plus – rear-facing Britax Baby Safe Plus – rear-facing max 13 kg child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fix- child seat, secured with the ISOFIX child seat, secured with the car's ture system. fixture system. seatbelt. Type approval: E1 03301146 Type approval: E1 03301146 Type approval: E1 03301146

2 With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

30 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 31 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety 01

Weight/Age Front seat Outer rear seat Centre rear seat Group 1 Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child Volvo Child seat – rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, 9-18 kg and straps. straps and support legs. (9-36 months) Type approval: E5 03135 Type approval: E5 03135

Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, Britax Fixway – rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system secured with the ISOFIX fixture sys- and straps. tem and straps. Type approval: E5 03171 Type approval: E5 03171

Group 2/3 Volvo Booster cushion – with or without Volvo Booster cushion – with or with- Volvo Booster cushion – with or with- backrest. out backrest. out backrest. 15-36 kg Type approval: E5 03139 Type approval: E5 03139 Type approval: E5 03139 (3-12 yr) Volvo 2-stage Integrated booster cushion – available as a factory fitted option. Type approval: E5 04189

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 31 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 32 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 Child safety

Integrated two-stage booster The booster cushions are specially designed to Raising the two-stage booster cushion cushions * provide optimum safety. In combination with Stage 1 the seatbelt they are approved for children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and who are 95 to 140 cm in height. Check before driving that: • the 2-stage integrated booster cushion is correctly set (see table below) and in locked position • the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted 5 7 6 8 9 7 6 1 the seatbelt does not lie across the child's 7 0 • 1 0 G throat or below the shoulder (see preced- G Correct position, the seatbelt is positioned above ing illustrations) the shoulder. • the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned Pull the handle forward and up in order to low over the pelvis to provide optimal pro- release the booster cushion. tection. Stage 1 Stage 2 Weight 22 - 36 kg 15 – 25 kg

Length 115 - 140 cm 95 - 120 cm

For instructions on adjusting the booster cushion's two levels, see pages 32–33. 9 1 7 7 1 0 G 7 9 6 7 1 0 Incorrect position, the head must not be posi- G tioned above the head restraint and the seatbelt must not be below the shoulder.

32 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 33 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety 01

Press the booster cushion backwards to Lift the booster cushion up at the front edge the booster cushion from the upper stage to lock. and press it back against the backrest to lock. the lower stage. Stage 2 WARNING Repair or replacement should only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion. If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion 2

appears to be undamaged, it may not afford 9 6 7 1 0 G

3 the same level of protection. The booster 8 7 7 1

0 cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily G worn. Pull the handle forwards to release the Start from the lower stage. Press the but- cushion. ton. NOTE It is not possible to adjust the booster cushion from stage 2 to stage 1. It must first be reset by being fully folded into the seat cushion. Refer to the heading below, Low- ering the two-stage booster cushion.

Lowering the two-stage booster cushion Lowering can take place from both the upper and lower stage to fully lowered position in the 4 9 6

cushion. However, it is not possible to adjust 7 1 0 G 4 8 7 7 1 0 G

33 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 34 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 Child safety

Press down with your hand in the centre of ISOFIX fixture system for child seats Size classes the cushion in order to lock it. Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in different sizes. This means that not all child WARNING seats are suitable for all seats in all car models. If the instructions regarding the two-stage Consequently, a size classification has been booster cushion are not followed then this introduced for child seats using the ISOFIX fix- could cause serious injury to a child in the ture system in order to assist users in choosing event of an accident. the correct child seat (see the following table).

IMPORTANT Size Description 4 6

0 class 1 2 Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. 0 G toys) left behind in the space under the A Full size, front-facing child cushion before lowering. Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system seat are concealed behind the lower section of the B Reduced size (alt.1), front- NOTE rear seat backrest, in the outer seats. facing child seat The booster cushion must be lowered first The location of the mounting points is indicated when lowering the backrest. by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see pre- B1 Reduced size (alt.2), front- ceding illustration). facing child seat Child safety locks, rear doors Press the seat cushion down to access the C Full size, rear-facing child mounting points. seat The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles D Reduced size, rear-facing can be blocked from opening from the inside. NOTE child seat For more information, see page 55. The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory for the passenger seat. E Rear-facing infant seat

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.

34 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 35 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

Child safety 01

Size Description WARNING NOTE class Never place a child in the passenger seat if Contact a Volvo dealer for Volvo recom- the car is equipped with an activated airbag. mendations on ISOFIX child seats. F Transverse infant seat, left- hand NOTE G Transverse infant seat, right- hand If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification then the car model must be included on the child seat's vehicle list.

Types of ISOFIX child seat Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats Front seat Outer rear seat Infant seat transverse max. 10 kg (0 – 9 months) F - -

G - -

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 10 kg (0 – 9 months) E OK OK

Infant seat, rear-facing max. 13 kg (0 – 12 months) E OK OK

D OK OK

C - OK

Child seat, rear-facing 9 – 18 kg (9 – 36 months) D OK OK

C - OK

35 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 36 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

01 Child safety

Type of child seat Weight (Age) Size class Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats Front seat Outer rear seat

Child seat, rear-facing 9 – 18 kg (9 – 36 months) B OK A OK A

B1 OK A OK A

A OK A OK A

A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.

Upper mounting points for child seats Volvo recommends that small children should points, see the seat manufacturer's instruc- sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age tions. as possible. WARNING NOTE The child seat's straps must always be For cars with folding head restraints on the routed under the rear head restraints before outside seats the head restraints should be being tensioned at the mounting point. folded to facilitate the installation of this type of child seat. 6 7

6 NOTE 7 1 0 G For cars equipped with a cargo area cover over the cargo area, this must be removed The car is equipped with upper mounting before a child seat can be fitted in the points for certain front-facing child seats. mounting points. These mounting points are located on the rear of the seat. For detailed information on how the child seat The upper mounting points are primarily should be tensioned in the upper mounting intended for use with front-facing child seats.

36 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 37 henrikrosenqvist

01 Safety

37 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 38 henrikrosenqvist

Remote control key/key blade ...... 40 Privacy locking* ...... 45 Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*...... 46 Keyless drive* ...... 48 Locking/unlocking ...... 50 Child safety locks ...... 55 Alarm* ...... 56

38 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 39 henrikrosenqvist

LOCKS AND ALARM 02 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 40 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

General The key blades' unique code is available at Indicator for locking/unlocking The car is supplied with two remote control authorised Volvo workshops, who can order When the car is locked or unlocked using the 02 keys or two PCCs (Personal Car new key blades. remote control key, the direction indicators Communicator). They are used to start the car confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly Loss of a remote control key and for locking and unlocking. performed: If you lose a remote control key then new ones More remote control keys can be ordered – up can be ordered at an authorised Volvo work- • Locking - one flash to six can be programmed and used for the shop. The remaining remote control keys must • Unlocking - two flashes. same car. then be taken to the workshop. The code of the After locking the indication is only given if all The PCC has increased functionality com- missing remote control key must be erased locks are activated once the doors have been pared with the remote control key. Only the from the system as a theft prevention measure. closed. remote control key is referred to in the remain- The current number of keys registered to the The function can be activated/deactivated der of this chapter when describing functions car can be checked under Car settings Car under Car settings Light settings Lock available in both the PCC and remote control Key memory Number of keys . For a key. confirmation light and Car settings Light description of the menu system, see settings Unlock confirmation light . page 118. WARNING For a description of the menu system, see If there are children in the car: Key memory – door mirrors and driver's page 118. seat Always remember to switch off the power The settings are automatically connected to Immobiliser supply to power windows and sunroof by Each remote control key has a unique code. removing the remote control key if the driver each respective remote control key, see pages leaves the car. 72 and 90. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key with the correct code. The function can be activated/deactivated Detachable key blade under Car settings Car Key memory The following error messages in the combined A remote control key contains a detachable Seat & mirror positions . For a description of instrument panel's information display are rela- metal key blade for mechanical locking/ the menu system, see page 118. ted to the electronic immobiliser: unlocking of the driver's door, glovebox and For cars with Keyless drive function, see tailgate (privacy locking). page 48. For key blade functions, see page 43. For privacy locking, see page 45.

40 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 41 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

Message Specification • the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within Key error Try again Error reading remote 20 metres from the car. 02 control key during For changing the battery, see page 46. start. Try to start the car again. Functions Car key not found Applies only to the PCC's Keyless drive function. Errors 9 7 0

reading the PCC 1 2 0 during starting. Try G to start the car PCC * (Personal Car Communicator). again. Information Immobiliser Try Remote control key start again function error during Function buttons 8 7 0

start. If the fault per- 1 Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate 2 0 sists; contact an G and then activates the alarm. authorised Volvo Remote control key. workshop. Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tail- Locking gate while the alarm is deactivated. For starting the car, see page 95. Unlocking The function can be changed from unlocking all doors simultaneously, to opening the driv- Low battery in remote control key Approach light duration er's door after one press of the button and, The batteries should be replaced if: Tailgate after a further press of the button - within 10 • the information symbol illuminates and Car seconds - opening the remaining doors. Panic function key Battery low is shown in the display The function is changed under Car settings and/or Lock settings Doors unlock . For a description of the menu system, see page 118.

41 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 42 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

Approach lighting – Used to switch on the Range Using the information button enables access to car's lighting at a distance. For more informa- The remote control key has a range of up to certain information from the car via the indica- 02 tion, see page 82. 20 m from the car. tor lamps. Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the alarm Using the information button NOTE for the tailgate only 1. For more information, see ± Press the information button . page 51. The remote control key functions can be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, All indicator lamps flash for approximately Panic function – Used to attract attention buildings, topographical conditions etc. The 7 seconds and the light travels around on in an emergency. car can always be locked/unlocked using the PCC. This indicates that the informa- the key blade, see page 44. tion from the car has been read. Press and hold the red button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to If any of the other buttons are pressed dur- activate the direction indicators and the horn. Unique functions PCC * ing this time then the reading is interrupted. The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least NOTE 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off If none of the indicator lamps illuminates automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds. with repeated use of the information button and in different locations (as well as after Global opening 7 seconds and after the light has travelled One long press - at least 4 seconds - on button around on the PCC), contact an authorised Volvo workshop. or opens or closes all windows. Also closes the sunroof if open. Indicator lamps display information in accord- 0 8

The function can be used to quickly air the car 0 1

2 ance with the following illustration: 0 in hot weather for example. G

WARNING Information button If the sunroof and windows are closed using Indicator lamps the remote control key, check that no one is in danger of getting hands caught.

1 The tailgate opens on cars with automatic tailgate control.

42 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 43 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

have a range of up to a maximum of 100 m from alarm system and can indicate at a distance the car. whether anybody is in the car. This indication is only displayed if the alarm was triggered. 02 NOTE The HBS detects an individual's heartbeat that The information button functions can be is transmitted to the car's bodywork. For this disrupted by surrounding radio waves, reason the function of the HBS can be distur- buildings, topographical conditions etc. bed in an environment subject to noise and vibration. Out of PCC range 2 6 2

0 If the PCC is too far away from the car for the

3 Detachable key blade 0 G information to be read then the status the car Using the remote control key's detachable key was last left in is shown, without the light trav- blade: Green continuous light – the car is locked. elling around on the PCC. • the driver's door can be opened manually Yellow continuous light – the car is If several PCCs are used for the car then it is if central locking cannot be activated with unlocked. only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking the remote control key that shows correct status. Red light flashing alternately in the two • access to the glovebox and cargo area indicator lamps – indicates, using the HBS (privacy locking) 2 is blocked, see (Heart Beat Sensor) that someone may be NOTE page 45. in the car. This indication is only displayed If no indicator lamps illuminate when the if the alarm was triggered. information button is used then this can be Red continuous light – the alarm has been because the last communication between triggered. the PCC and the car was disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topo- Range graphical conditions etc. The PCC lock functions have a range of up to 20 m from the car. Heart Beat Sensor The approach lighting, panic function and the The function operates using an HBS ( Heart functions controlled by the information button Beat Sensor). HBS is a supplement to the car's

2 Applies to certain markets ``

43 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 44 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Remote control key/key blade

Removing the key blade Unlocking doors with the key blade If central locking cannot be activated with the 02 remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then the driver's door can be opened as follows:

NOTE When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is triggered. 2 8 0 1 2 0 G 1. Unlock the driver's door using the key blade in the door handle's keyhole. Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side. 2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the At the same time pull the key blade straight remote control key in the ignition switch. out backwards. Inserting the key blade Carefully refit the key blade in place in the remote control key, to avoid damaging it. 1. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot. 2. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

44 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 45 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Privacy locking *

Privacy locking parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then Activating/deactivating locked and the tailgate lock is disconnected from the central locking. The tailgate cannot be 02 opened with either the central locking button in the front doors or the remote control key. This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activate/deactivate the alarm, to open the doors and to drive the car. The remote control key is handed over without 8 9 0 6 5 8 the detachable key blade which the owner then 0 7 2 1 0 0 G G keeps. Active locks for remote control key, with key blade Activating privacy locking. NOTE and privacy locking not activated. To activate privacy locking: Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover over the cargo area before closing the tail- Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock. gate, see page 211. Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise.

Pull out the key blade. The information display shows a message at the same time.

NOTE Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote 0

7 control key but keep it in a safe place 8 7 1 0

G instead.

Active locks for remote control key, without key blade and privacy locking activated . • Deactivation takes place in reverse order. The privacy locking function is intended for For information on locking the glovebox only, when the car is left for service, with a hotel see page 51.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 45 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 46 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC *

Replacing the battery IMPORTANT 02 Avoid touching the battery and its terminals with your fingers, as this could damage their functionality.

Battery replacement Closely study how the battery/batteries are 5 8

0 secured on the inside of the cover, with 1 2 0 G regard to their ( +) and ( –) sides. 8 1 5 5 1 0

G Remote control key 1.Carefully prize out the battery. Opening 2. Install a new one with the ( +) side down. Slide the spring-loaded catch to the PCC * side. 1.Carefully prize out the batteries. At the same time pull the key blade 2. First install one new one with the ( +) side

6 up. 8 0

1 straight out backwards. 2 0 G 3.Position the white plastic tab in between Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the and finally install a second new battery with hole behind the spring-loaded catch and the ( +) side down. gently prize the remote control key up. Battery type NOTE Use batteries with the designation CR2430, 3V - one in the remote control key and two in the Turn the remote control key over with the PCC. buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries falling out when it is opened. Assembly 1. Press the remote control key together.

46 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 47 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC *

2. Hold the remote control key with the slot pointed up and lower the key blade into its slot. 02 3. Lightly press the key blade. You should hear a "click" when the key blade is locked in.

IMPORTANT Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally-friendly way.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 47 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 48 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive *

Keyless drive (only PCC) possible to lock or unlock a door if the PCC is Interference to PCC function on the opposite side of the car. Electromagnetic fields and screening can inter- 02 Keyless lock and ignition system The red rings in the preceding illustration indi- fere with the keyless drive system. For this cate the range covered by the system's anten- reason, do not place the PCC near mobile nas. phones or metallic objects. If all PCCs are removed from the car when the If interference is experienced nonetheless, use engine is running or key position II is active the PCC and key blade in the normal way, see (see page 71) and if all doors are closed, then page 41. a warning message is shown in the information Unlocking display and an audio reminder signal sounds at Open the doors with the door handles or open the same time. the tailgate with the tailgate's handle. 1 7

8 The warning message clears and the audio 7

1 Unlocking with the key blade 0 G reminder signal stops when the PCC is brought If the keyless drive function in the PCC is not back to the car after: operating, then the driver's door can be The keyless drive function in the PCC allows • a door has been opened and closed unlocked with the key blade. In this case cen- the car to be unlocked, driven and locked with- the PCC is inserted into the ignition switch tral locking is not activated. out the need for a key. You simply have to have • the PCC with you. The system makes it easier • the READ button has been pressed. NOTE and more convenient to open the car, e.g. Handling the PCC safely when your hands are full. If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in the Unlocking with the key blade triggers the alarm. For deactivation, see page 56. The car's two PCCs incorporate the Keyless car, it is deactivated temporarily when the car function. Additional PCCs can be ordered. is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry. However, if someone breaks into the car, Key memory – driver's seat and door PCC range mirrors In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres from reactivated. It is therefore important to handle PCC memory function the car door handle or tailgate. This means that all PCCs with great care. If several people each with a PCC approach the the person who wishes to lock or unlock a door car, then the settings for seat and mirrors are must have the PCC with him or her. It is not IMPORTANT implemented for the person who opens the driver's door. Never leave a PCC behind in the car.

48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 49 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive *

After the driver's door has been opened by Lock settings Door handle, right rear person A with PCC A, but person B with PCC The keyless function can be adapted to specify Centre console, under the rear section B shall drive, the settings can be changed in which of the car doors are to be unlocked, 02 three ways: under Car settings Lock settings Centre console, under the front section. • Standing by the driver's door, or sitting Keyless entry . For a description of the menu behind the steering wheel, person B system, see page 118. WARNING presses their PCC's unlock button, see page 41. People with pacemaker operations should Antenna location not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless • Select one of three possible memories for system's antennae with their pacemaker. seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see This is to prevent interference between the page 73. pacemaker and the keyless system. • Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see page 72 and 90. Locking Lock the doors and the tailgate by pressing the lock button on one of the door handles on the outside. 9 7 1 1

All doors and the tailgate must be closed 2 0 before the car can be locked. Otherwise the car G will not be locked. The keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car: NOTE Tailgate, by wiper motor On cars with automatic transmission, the gear selector must be set in the P position Door handle, left rear – otherwise the car cannot be locked or the alarm armed. Roof, above centre rear seat Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 49 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 50 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

From the outside car from being left unlocked unintentionally. Locking The remote control key locks/unlocks all doors For cars with alarms, see page 56. Press the door lock button after the front doors 02 and the tailgate simultaneously. The lock but- are closed. Press and hold to also close all of tons and door handles are disengaged during From the inside the windows and the sunroof. locking which also prevents opening from the All the doors can be locked manually with their inside, so-called deadlocks function*, see respective lock buttons after they have been page 53. closed. The fuel filler flap can be opened when the car is unlocked, see page 202. It cannot be Automatic locking opened if the car is locked and the alarm is The doors and tailgate can be locked automat- armed. ically when the car starts to move. The function can be activated/deactivated NOTE under Car settings Lock settings 6

1 Doors automatic lock . For a description of the 2

The car can be locked even if a door is 9 1 0 open 1. It is also locked when the door is G menu system, see page 118. closed, and there is a risk that the remote control key will be locked in. All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked or unlocked simultaneously using the door but- WARNING tons on the door panel. Be aware that there is a risk that you can be Unlocking locked in the car if it is locked from the out- A door can be unlocked from the inside in two side. different ways: • Press the door unlock button. Automatic relocking Press and hold to also open all windows. If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes of unlocking, all are locked • Pull the door handle once and release. Pull again automatically. This function prevents the the door handle again to open the door.

1 Only applies to cars in certain markets, but not to cars with Keyless drive.

50 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 51 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

Glovebox Tailgate The doors remain locked and armed.

NOTE 02 When the tailgate is closed it remains unlocked until the car is relocked with the remote control key.

Locking with the remote control key Press the remote control key button for locking, see page 41. 3 8 4 9 5 0 0 1

2 2 If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm 0 0 G G indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash to show that alarm is armed. The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked Unlocking with the remote control key using the remote control key's detachable key The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed*, Unlocking the car from inside blade. (For information on the key blade, see and the tailgate unlocked and opened on its page 44). own* by using the remote control key. Locking the glovebox: Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock. NOTE On cars with the power operated tailgate Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. option, the tailgate is opened – otherwise it The keyhole is horizontal in the locked is only unlocked, see page 52. position. Pull out the key blade. If the car is equipped with an alarm* the alarm 9 9 0 1

indicator on the instrument panel stops to 2 0 Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order. show that alarm for the whole of the car is not G For information on privacy locking, see armed. The alarm's level and movement sen- Press the lighting panel button to unlock page 45. sors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are automatically disconnected. and open* the tailgate.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 52 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

Power operated tailgate * NOTE WARNING 02 • If the system has been operating con- Pay attention to the risk of crushing when tinuously for more than 60 seconds then opening/closing. Before starting to open/ it is switched off to avoid overloading. It close; make sure that there is nobody close can be used again after about 10 to the tailgate as a crushing injury could minutes. have serious consequences. • If the battery has been discharged or Always operate the tailgate with caution. disconnected then the cover must be opened and closed manually once in Manual tailgate operation order to reset the system. The system is disengaged if the outside handle 6 7 8

7 is activated a second time. The tailgate can 1 0 G Snow and wind then be operated manually. If the tailgate is forced down by something just Opening the tailgate IMPORTANT when it is being opened, e.g. snow, ice or strong wind, and this causes the tailgate to Opening can be carried out in three ways: Pay attention to the height of the roof when lower, then it is closed automatically. • using power operation. Do not use power The button on the lighting panel - tailgate operation with low roof heights, see Pinch protection hold the button depressed until the tailgate under the heading "Interrupt opening/clos- If something with sufficient resistance prevents starts to open. ing the tailgate". the tailgate from opening/closing then the • The tailgate's outside handle. pinch protection is activated. • Long press on the remote control key's • During opening the power tailgate opera- button for unlocking the tailgate. tion is switched off and the tailgate is disengaged. Closing the tailgate Close using the close button on the tailgate or During closing the tailgate returns in the • manually. opposite direction. • Press the tailgate's button – the tailgate closes automatically.

52 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 53 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

Stop the opening/closing of the tailgate Temporary deactivation 3. Select Activate once : The instrument This can be carried out in four ways: panel display shows the message 02 • Reduced guard - See manual and the The button on the lighting panel deadlocks function is switched off when • The button on the remote control key the car is locked. • The tailgate's button or • The tailgate's outside handle - Pull the han- Select Ask on exit : Each time the engine dle a second time. is switched off the audio system's display The following takes place: shows the message ENTER reduces protection until the engine is started 0 6

• During opening the power tailgate opera- 3 1

2 again. Press EXIT to cancel - then select 0 tion is switched off and the tailgate is dis- G one of the alternatives: engaged. Active menu options are indicated with a cross. • During closing the tailgate returns to fully • If the deadlocks function shall be switched open position. Navigation off: Press ENTER and lock the car. ENTER If the car is equipped with an alarm with move- Deadlocks * ment and tilt detectors*, then these are MENU switched off at the same time, see page 56. When deadlocked, the doors cannot be opened from the inside if they are locked. EXIT The next time the engine is started, the system is reset to zero and the instrument panel dis- The deadlocks are activated with the remote If someone is going to stay in the car but the play shows the message Full guard at which control key and are set after a 10 second delay doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function and the alarm's move- after the doors are locked. the deadlocks function can be temporarily ment and tilt detectors* are re-engaged. switched off. This is carried out as follows: The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock or state with the remote control key. The driver's 1. Access the menu system under Car door can also be unlocked with the detachable settings (for a detailed description of the • If the locking system shall not be changed: key blade. menu system, see page 118). Select no options at all and lock the car. Or press EXIT and lock the car. 2. Select Reduced guard .

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 53 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 54 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Locking/unlocking

NOTE 02 If the car is equipped with an alarm: Remember that the car's alarm is armed when the car is locked. If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.

WARNING Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

54 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 55 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

Manual blocking of the rear doors Electrical locking of the rear doors and power windows * 02 7 7 0 1 2 0 0 G 0 3 9 1 0 G The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible When the electric child safety lock is active: when the doors are open. • the rear windows can only be opened with ± Use the key blade to turn the lock and thus the driver's door control panel activate or deactivate the child safety lock. • the rear doors cannot be opened from the The door cannot be opened from inside. inside. 1. Child safety locks are activated/deacti- The doors can be opened from inside. vated in key position I or II see page 71. 2. Press the button in the driver's door control NOTE panel. Cars with electric child safety locks do not > The information display shows a mes- have manual child locks. sage. The lamp on the switch illuminates when the locks are activated.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 55 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 56 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm *

General NOTE Arming the alarm The alarm is triggered if: • Press the remote control key lock button. 02 Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm • a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened system components. All such attempts Disarming the alarm could affect the terms of insurance. • a non-approved key is used or if an attempt • Press the remote control key unlock but- is made to force the ignition switch ton. Alarm indicator • a movement is detected in the passenger Deactivating a triggered alarm compartment (if fitted with a movement Press the remote control key unlock button or detector) insert the remote control key in the ignition • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted switch. with a tilt detector*) • a battery cable is disconnected Other alarm functions • anyone tries to disconnect the siren. Automatic re-arming of the alarm If there is a fault in the alarm system, the infor- This function prevents the car being left with mation display shows a message. Contact an alarm disarmed unintentionally.

authorised Volvo workshop. 3 0 1 1 2 0 If the car is unlocked with the remote control G NOTE key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the A red LED on the instrument panel indicates doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 The movement detectors trigger the alarm minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- in the event of movements in the passenger the alarm system's status: compartment. For this reason the alarm armed. The car is relocked at the same time. LED not lit – Alarm not armed could be triggered if the car is left with a • Alarm signals window open or if an electric passenger • The LED flashes once every other second compartment heater is used. To avoid this: – Alarm is armed When the alarm is triggered, the following happens: Close the windows when leaving the car and • The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the aim the air from the passenger compart- A siren sounds for less than 30 seconds. ment heater so that it is not directed up into alarm (and until the remote control key is • The siren has its own battery which is inde- the passenger compartment. inserted in the ignition switch and key position I is selected) – Alarm has been trig- pendent of the car battery. gered. • The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm has been deactivated.

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 57 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm *

Remote control key not working MENU If the car is equipped with the deadlocks func- If the remote control key is not working, the tion* then it is switched off at the same time, EXIT alarm can still be switched off and the car see page 53. 02 started as follows: To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm - The next time the engine is started, the system 1. Open the driver's door with the key blade. for example when leaving a dog in the car or is reset to zero and the instrument panel dis- The alarm is triggered and the siren during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt play shows the message Full guard at which sounds. detectors can be temporarily switched off. This the movement and tilt detectors and the dead- is carried out as follows: locks function are re-engaged. 2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch. The alarm is deactivated. The alarm 1. Access the menu system under Car or indicator flashes quickly until the remote settings (for a detailed description of the menu system, see page 118). • If the detectors shall not be switched off: control key is inserted. Select no options at all and lock the car. Or 2. Select Reduced guard . press EXIT and lock the car. Reduced alarm level 3. Select Activate once : The instrument panel display shows the message Testing the alarm system Reduced guard See manual and the movement and tilt detectors are switched Testing the movement detector in the off when the car is locked. passenger compartment 1. Close all windows. Remain in the car. or 2. Arming the alarm, see page 56. Select Ask on exit : Each time the engine is switched off the audio system's display 3. Wait 15 seconds. shows the message ENTER reduces 4. Trigger the alarm by moving your arms for- protection until the engine is started

0 ward and back at backrest height. A siren 6 3 1

2 once again. EXIT cancels - then select 0 sounds and all direction indicators flash. G one of the alternatives: Active menu options are indicated with a cross. 5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car • If the movement and tilt detectors shall be with the remote control key. Navigation switched off: Press ENTER and lock the car. Testing the alarm sensors in the doors ENTER 1. Arming the alarm, see page 56.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 58 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

Alarm *

2. Wait 15 seconds.

02 3. Unlock the driver's door using the key blade. 4. Open the driver's door. A siren sounds and all direction indicators flash. 5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key. Testing the alarm sensors in the bonnet 1. Sit in the car and deactivate the alarm, see page 56. 2. Arm the alarm, see page 56 . Remain in the car and lock the doors with the button on the remote control key. 3. Wait 15 seconds. 4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the dashboard. A siren sounds and all direction indicators flash. 5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.

58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 59 henrikrosenqvist

02 Locks and alarm

59 60 h V enrikosqv 70/XC * O ptio n/ac (Y285/ es W P W Key Gearboxs Fot Ins A S Hi S S Lightn S Ho S P st ow l-w t t t t e a ory in ipers l arting arting arting eri Y381); ats rking meLink trumens Descnt dows, , er po for hel br . . ng ...... sunro sito ake m and . brak th th th ...... 9; whe ore d e e e reavi ...... 3 rive ns. . EU* w informat . eng eng eng and Co e ...... ashing ...... f*. l . . . – ntrol ...... ine ine ine ...... contr ...... AWD* . w ...... on, ...... and – – ...... (HDC) extrnal F ...... s ol . lexi ...... e ...... s dor ...... Introduc ...... fu ...... el ...... mi ...... bat ...... ros ...... ion...... ery ...... 107 ...... 71 . . . .. 93 . . . 104 10 12 105 109 86 89 7 62 9 97 95 76 72 208-35T:16 38+01: 0; Page 60

G02091 2 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 61 henrikrosenqvist

YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT 03 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 62 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Instrument overview

03 7 0 1 1 2 0 G

Left-hand drive.

62 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 63 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Function Page Function Page Menus and messages, 77, Controls for active chas- 156 direction indicators, 80, 120, sis (Four-C)* main/dipped beam, trip 152 computer Wipers and washing 86, 87 03 Cruise control 157, 158 Steering wheel adjust- 76 ment Horn, airbags 18, 76 Parking brake* 109 Combined instrument 65, 69 panel Bonnet opener 224

Menu, audio and phone 118, Seat adjustment* 72 control 135, 188 Headlamp control, 51, 77, Ignition switch 71 opener for fuel filler flap 202 and tailgate Start/stop button 95

Hazard warning flashers 79

Door handle -

Control panel 50, 55, 89, 90

Menu control, climate 118, control and audio system 125, 137

Climate control, ECC* 125

Gear selector 100

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 64 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

10 10 20 11 11 19

17 16 15 14 13

12 8 0 1 1 2 0 G

Right-hand drive.

64 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 65 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Function Page Function Page Information displays Hazard warning flashers 79 Steering wheel adjust- 76 ment Ignition switch 71 Menus and messages, 77, direction indicators, 80, 120, Start/stop button 95 03 main/dipped beam, trip 152 Cruise control 157, 158 computer

Combined instrument 65, 69 Controls for active chas- 156

sis (Four-C)* 2

panel 1 1 1 2 0 G Horn, airbags 18, 76 Gear selector 100 Information displays. Menu, audio and phone 118, Climate control, ECC* 125 The information displays show information on control 135, 188 Menu control, climate 118, some of the car's functions, e.g. cruise control, Wipers and washing 86, 87 control and audio system 125, 137 trip computer and messages. The information is shown with text and symbols. Headlamp control, 51, 77, There are further descriptions under the func- opener for fuel filler flap 202 tions that use the information displays. and tailgate

Door handle -

Control panel 50, 55, 89, 90

Seat adjustment* 72

Bonnet opener 224

Parking brake 109

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 66 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Meters Indicator, information and warning symbols go out after 5 seconds except the symbols symbol for faults in the car's emissions system and the symbol for low oil pressure. Indicator and information symbols Symbol Specification 03 Direction indicators on trailer

Emissions system 3 1 1 1 2 0 2

G ABS fault 8 2 8 1 0 G Meters in the combined instrument panel. Rear fog lamp on Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols. Indicator and information symbols Fuel gauge. See also Trip computer, page Stability system 152, and Refuelling, page 202. Indicator and warning symbols 1 Tachometer. The meter indicates engine Main beam and direction indicator symbol Engine preheater (diesel) speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm). Functionality check Low level in fuel tank All indicator and warning symbols illuminate in key position II or when the engine is started. Information, read display text When the engine has started, all the symbols should go out except the parking brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is Main beam On disengaged. If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II then all

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are made via display text. For information on checking the oil level, see page 225.

66 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 67 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Specification Rear fog lamp NOTE This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp Left-hand direction indicators is on. When a service message is shown, the symbol and message are cleared using the Stability system READ button, or clear automatically after a Right-hand direction indicators A flashing symbol indicates that the stability while. system is operating. If the symbol illuminates 03 with constant glow then there is a fault in the Main beam On Direction indicators on trailer system. The symbol illuminates when main beam is on This symbol flashes when the direction indica- Engine preheater (diesel) and with main beam flash tors are used and the trailer is connected. If the This symbol illuminates during engine preheat- symbol flashes more quickly then one of the Left/right-hand direction indicators ing. Preheating occurs when the temperature lamps on the car or the trailer is broken. Both direction indicator symbols flash when is below 2 °C. The car can be started once the the hazard warning flashers are used. Emissions system symbol goes out. If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to Low level in fuel tank Indicator and warning symbols a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to When the symbol illuminates the level in the an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- Symbol Specification fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible. tem checked. Low oil pressure A Information, read display text ABS fault When one of the car's systems does not If this symbol illuminates then the system is not behave as intended, this information symbol Parking brake applied working. The car's regular brake system con- illuminates and a text appears on the informa- tinues to work, but without the ABS function. tion display. The message text is cleared with Airbags – SRS 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the the READ button, see page 120, or it disap- engine. pears automatically after a time (time depend- Seatbelt reminder 2. Restart the engine. ing on which function is indicated). The information symbol can also illuminate in 3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to conjunction with other symbols. Alternator not charging an authorised Volvo workshop to have the ABS system checked.

67 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 68 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Symbol Specification Airbags – SRS page 227. If the brake fluid level is nor- If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates mal but the symbols are still illuminated, Fault in brake system while driving, it means a fault has been the car can be driven, with great care, to detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or an authorised Volvo workshop to have the brake system checked. Warning IC systems. Drive immediately to an authorised Volvo workshop to have the system checked. 03 WARNING A For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure Seatbelt reminder is not used. Warnings are made via display text, see pages This symbol illuminates if someone in a front If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the 224 and 226. seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. Low oil pressure in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt. If this symbol illuminates during driving then Alternator not charging The reason for the loss of brake fluid must the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the be investigated by an authorised Volvo This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault workshop. engine immediately and check the engine oil has occurred in the electrical system. Contact level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illumi- an authorised Volvo workshop. nates and the oil level is normal, contact an Fault in brake system WARNING authorised Volvo workshop. If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level If the brake and ABS symbols are illumi- Parking brake applied may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place nated at the same time, there is a risk that This symbol illuminates with a constant glow and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, the rear end will skid during heavy braking. when the parking brake is applied. With the see page 227. electric parking brake, this symbol flashes If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at the Warning while it is being applied and then illuminates The red warning symbol illuminates when a with a constant glow. same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system. fault has been indicated which could affect the A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen. safety and/or driveability of the car. An explan- Read the message on the information display. 1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the atory text is shown on the information display engine. at the same time. The symbol remains visible NOTE 2. Restart the engine. until the fault has been rectified but the text message can be cleared with the READ but- If both symbols extinguish, continue This symbol also illuminates when the • ton, see page 121. The warning symbol can mechanical parking brake is only lightly driving. applied. also illuminate in conjunction with other sym- • If the symbols remain illuminated, check bols. the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see

68 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 69 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Action: Trip meter Clock 1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car further. 2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display. Clear 03 the message using the READ button. Reminder – doors not closed If one of the doors, the bonnet 2 or tailgate is not closed properly then the information or 3 5 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 warning symbol illuminates together with an 0 0 G G explanatory text message in the combined instrument panel. Stop the car in a safe place Trip meter and controls. Clock and setting knob. as soon as possible and close the door, bonnet Display for trip meter Controls for setting the clock. or boot lid, whichever is open. Controls for switching between trip meters Information display for showing the time. If the car is driven at a speed lower than T1 and T2 , as well as resetting the trip approx. 7 km/h then the information Turn the knob clockwise/anticlockwise to set meters. symbol illuminates. the time. The set time is shown in the informa- The meters are used to measure short dis- tion display. If the car is driven at a speed higher tances. than about 7 km/h then the warning The clock can be temporarily replaced by a symbol illuminates. One short press on the control switches symbol in conjunction with a message, see between the two trip meters T1 and T2 . A long page 121. press (more than 2 seconds) resets an active trip meter to zero. The distance is shown in the display.

2 Only cars with alarm*. ``

69 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 70 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Instruments and controls

Controls for trip meter and clock

03 1 4 1 6 1 0 G

Location of controls.

70 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 71 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Key positions

Functions IMPORTANT If the car is moving or has automatic transmission and the gear selector is not in position P: Foreign objects in the ignition switch can Press twice or hold the button depressed until impair the function or destroy the lock. the engine stops. Do not insert the remote control key backwards! Grip the end with the detachable key Return to key position 0 blade. see page 44. START/STOP ENGINE I Press to return from 03 or II to key position 0 0. Key position 0 Insert the remote control key in the ignition NOTE switch. During towing the remote control key should 6 2 1 1 2

0 remain in the ignition switch so that the G Key position I lighting can be switched on. Press the remote control key into the ignition Ignition switch with remote control key, start/stop button. switch and press START/STOP ENGINE . Posi- Function Insert and remove the remote control key NOTE tion The remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch. With one gentle push the remote To reach key position II without starting the 0 Odometer, clock and tempera- engine - do not depress the brake/clutch ture gauge are illuminated. The control key is captured into the correct posi- pedal. tion. steering lock is deactivated. The audio system can be used. The remote control key is withdrawn from the Key position II ignition switch by means of one touch. The key Press the remote control key into the ignition I Sunroof, power windows, phone, is then ejected and can be removed. Automatic switch and press START/STOP ENGINE for ventilation fan, ECC and wind- transmission* must be in position P. approx. 2 seconds. screen wipers can be used. For information on the audio system's func- Starting the engine II The headlamps come on. Warn- tions with remote control key removed, see ing/indicator lamps illuminate for Start the engine, see page 95. page 135. 5 seconds. All equipment oper- Stopping the engine ates apart from heated seats and Press START/STOP ENGINE . rear window defroster which only work when the engine is running.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 71 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 72 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Seats

Front seats WARNING Power seat * Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Check that the seat is locked in position.

03 Lowering the front seat backrest * 3 7 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 0 0 G G

Lumbar support adjustment, turn the Front edge of seat cushion up/down 1 wheel . Seat forward/backward and up/down Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust 9 2 1

1 Backrest rake 2

the distance to the steering wheel and ped- 0 G als. Check that the seat is locked after The power front seats have overload protection changing position. The passenger seat backrest can be folded which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion, forward to make room for long loads. object. If this happens, go to key position I or pump up/down. 0 and wait a short time before adjusting the Move the seat as far back/down as possi- seat again. Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel. ble. Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down. Adjust the backrest to an upright position can be made at a time. Control panel for power seat*. Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest Preparations and fold it forward. The seats can be adjusted for a certain time Push the seat forward so that the head restraint after unlocking the door with the remote con- "locks" in under the glovebox. trol key without the key in the ignition switch.

1 Also applies to power seat.

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 73 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Seats

Seat adjustment is normally made in key posi- Using a stored setting NOTE tion I and can always be made when the engine Hold one of the memory buttons depressed is running. until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you The seat and the door mirrors do not move if they are already set the relevant position. release the button then the movement of the Seat with memory function * seat will stop. It is also possible to use the key memory by Key memory * in remote control key pressing the unlock button on the remote con- 03 The positions of the driver's seat and the door trol key when the driver's door is open. mirrors are stored in the key memory when the The key memory can be activated/deactivated car is locked with the remote control key. under Car Key memory Seat & mirror positions . For a description of the menu system, see page 118.

NOTE 4 3 1 1 2 0

G The key memory in the two remote control keys and the seat memory are completely independent of each other. Store setting Memory button Emergency stop 7 8 3

Memory button 4 1

0 If the seat accidentally begins to move, press G Memory button one of the buttons to stop the seat. When the car is unlocked with the same remote Restarting to reach the seat position stored in Button for storing settings control key and the driver's door is opened the the key memory is performed by pressing the 1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors. driver's seat and also the door mirrors auto- unlock button on the remote control key. The matically adopt the positions stored in the key driver's door must then be open. 2. Hold the button depressed to store set- memory. tings while depressing one of the memory buttons.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 73 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 74 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING with middle of the back of the head. Slide it up Lowering the rear seat backrest as required. The triple-section rear seat backrest can be Risk of crushing! Make sure that children do folded in different ways in order to facilitate not play with the controls. Check that there To lower the head restraint again, the button are no objects in front of, behind or under (located in the centre between the backrest loading long objects. the seat during adjustment. Ensure that and head restraint, see illustration) must be none of the backseat passengers will be pressed in while the head restraint is pressed NOTE 03 trapped. down. The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted Heated/ventilated seats * Manual lowering of the outer head upwards, in order that the rear backrests For heated/ventilated seats, see page 126. restraints, rear seat can be folded forward fully.

Rear seats • The left-hand backrest can be folded separately. Head restraint, centre seat, rear • The centre backrest can be folded separately. • The right-hand backrest can be folded together with the centre backrest. • All backrests can be folded together. 0 6 7 8 1 0 G

Pull the locking handle closest to the head

4 restraint to fold the head restraint forward. 2 6 7 1 0 G The head restraint is moved back manually 7 4 7

until a "click" can be heard. 7 1 0 The head restraint can be adjusted vertically to G suit the height of the passenger. The upper edge of the head restraint should be aligned

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 75 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Seats

WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked after raising.

03 3 0 9 7 1 0 G

If the centre backrest is being lowered – release and adjust down the centre backrest's head restraint, see page 74. The outer head restraints are lowered automatically when the outer backrests are lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking handle while folding the backrest forward at the same time. A red indicator on the lock catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place. Raising takes place in reverse order.

NOTE When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

75 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 76 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Steering wheel

Adjusting WARNING Horn Adjust and secure the steering wheel before driving.

With speed related power steering * the level of 03 steering force can be adjusted, see page 156.

Keypads * 0 8 4 3 1 1 1 1 2 2 0 0 G G

Adjusting the steering wheel. Horn. Lever - releasing the steering wheel Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal. Possible steering wheel positions The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and depth: 9 3

1. Pull the lever towards you to release the 1 1 2 0 steering wheel. G 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position Keypads in the steering wheel. that suits you. Cruise control, see page 157 3. Push back the lever to fix the steering Adaptive cruise control, see page 158 wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as Audio and phone control, see page 135 you push the lever back.

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 77 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Light switches The intensity of the instrument lighting is Main/dipped beam adjusted with the thumbwheel. Headlamp levelling The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting 03 the height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is heavily laden. 1. Allow the engine to run or have the remote control key in position I. 1 2 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 0 0

G 2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/ G lower beam alignment. Overview, light switches. Headlamp control and stalk switch. Thumbwheel for adjusting display and Cars with Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenon Position for main beam flash instrument lighting headlamps* have automatic headlamp levelling and are therefore not equipped with a Position for main beam Rear fog lamp thumbwheel. Front fog lamps* Posi- Specification Light switches tion Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling Automatic*/deactivated dipped beam. Only main beam flash.

Instrument lighting Position/parking lamps Different display and instrument lighting is switched on depending on key position, see page 71. Automatic dipped beam. Main beam and main beam flash The display lighting is automatically subdued work in this position. in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the thumbwheel.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 78 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

NOTE When main beam has been activated the sym- tion. The function is only active in twilight or bol illuminates in the combined instru- darkness and only when the car is moving. Main beam can only be activated in position ment panel. . The function can be deactivated/activated with the button. Active Bi-Xenon Lights * Main beam flash Position/parking lamps 03 Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to the position for main beam flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released. Dipped beam When the engine is started, dipped beam is activated automatically* if the headlamp control is in position . If necessary, auto-

matic dipped beam for this position can be G 0 2 1 4 1 4 deactivated by an authorised Volvo workshop. 4 1 3 1 2 Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) 0 G In position dipped beam is always acti- and activated (right) respectively. vated automatically when the engine is running If the car is equipped with active headlamps Headlamp control in position for position/parking lamps. or when the remote control key is in position (Active Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL) the light from II . the headlamps follows the steering wheel Turn the headlamp control to the centre posi- movement in order to provide maximum light- tion (number plate lighting comes on at the Main beam ing in bends and junctions and so provide same time). Main beam can only be activated when the increased safety. Rear position lamps also come on when the headlamp control is in position . Acti- The function is activated automatically when tailgate is opened in order to alert anybody vate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk behind. switch towards the steering wheel to the end the car is started. The button in the cen- position and release. tre console illuminates when the function is activated, it flashes in the event of a malfunc-

78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 79 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Brake lights Front fog lamps * Rear fog lamp The brake light automatically comes on during braking. Emergency brake light and automatic hazard warning flashers, EBL Emergency Brake Lights (EBL) are activated in 03 the event of heavy braking or if the ABS brakes are activated. This function means that the brake light flashes to immediately alert cars travelling behind. 5 6 4 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 0 0

The system is activated if ABS is used for more G G than 0.5 seconds or in the event of heavy braking, however, only when braking from speeds Button for front fog lamps. Button for rear fog lamp. above 50 km/h. When the speed of the car is The front fog lamps can be switched on along The rear fog lamp consists of one rear lamp and lower than 30 km/h the brake lights shine nor- with main/dipped beam or position/parking can only be switched on in combination with mally again and the hazard warning flashers lamps. main/dipped beam or the front fog lamps. are switched on automatically. The hazard warning flashers remain on until the car accel- Press the button for on/off. The light in the but- Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog lamp erates again but can be deactivated with the ton illuminates when the fog lamps are on. indicator symbol on the combined button for hazard warning flashers instrument panel and the light in the button illu- NOTE minate when the rear fog lamp is switched on. Regulations for using front fog lamps vary The rear fog lamps are switched off automati- between different countries. cally when the engine is switched off.

NOTE Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary between different countries.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 80 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Hazard warning flashers Direction indicators/flashers Interior lighting

03 7 8 9 4 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 0 0 0 G G G

Button for hazard warning flashers. Direction indicators/flashers. Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting. Press the button to activate the hazard warning Short flash sequence Reading lamp, left-hand side flashers. Both direction indicator symbols in Move the stalk switch up or down to the the combined instrument panel flash when the first position and release. The direction Reading lamp, right-hand side hazard warning flashers are in use. indicators flash three times. Interior lighting The hazard warning flashers are activated automatically when the car brakes so suddenly Continuous flash sequence All lighting in the passenger compartment can that the emergency brake lights (EBL) are acti- Move the stalk switch up or down to the be switched on and off manually within vated and speed is below 30 km/h. They outer position. 30 minutes from when: remain on when the car has stopped and are The stalk switch remains in its position and is • the engine has been switched off and the moved back manually, or automatically by the deactivated automatically when the car is remote control key is in position 0 driven off again or the button is depressed. steering wheel movement. • the car has been unlocked but the engine Direction indicator symbols has not been started. For direction indicator symbols, see page 66.

80 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 81 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Front roof lighting Vanity mirror • the car is unlocked with the remote control The front reading lamps are switched on or off The lighting for the vanity mirror, see key or key blade, see pages 41 or 44 by pressing the relevant button in the roof con- page 187, is switched on and off respectively • the engine is switched off and the remote sole. when the cover is opened or closed. control key is in position 0. Rear roof lighting Lighting, cargo area Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when: The lighting in the cargo area is switched on 03 and off respectively when the tailgate is • the engine is started. opened or closed. • the car is locked. Automatic lighting The passenger compartment lighting comes The switch for passenger compartment light- on and remains on for two minutes if one of the ing has three positions for the lighting in the doors is open. passenger compartment: If any lighting is switched on manually and the • Off – right-hand side depressed, automatic car is locked then it will be switched off automatically after two minutes.

0 lighting deactivated. 5 1 1 2 0 G • Neutral position – automatic lighting activated. Home safe light duration Rear roof lighting. • On – left-hand side depressed, passenger Some of the exterior lighting can be kept The lamps are switched on or off by pressing compartment lighting on. switched on to work as home safe lighting after each respective button. Neutral position the car has been locked. Courtesy lighting When the button is in neutral position the pas- 1. Remove the remote control key from the Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- senger compartment lighting is switched on ignition switch. and off automatically in accordance with the ment lighting) is switched on and off respec- 2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward the following: tively when a side door is opened or closed. steering wheel to the end position and The passenger compartment lighting is release it. The function can be activated in Glovebox lighting switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if: the same way as with main beam flash, see Glovebox lighting is switched on and off page 77. respectively when the lid is opened or closed. 3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

81 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 82 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting When the function is activated, dipped beam, Adjusting headlamp pattern Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenon the parking lamps, direction indicator lamps, headlamps * door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, inner roof lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on. The length of time for which the home safe 03 lighting should be kept on can be set under Car settings Light settings Home safe light duration . For a description of the menu system, see page 118. 1 5 1 1 2 0 2 G 4 4

Approach light duration 9 1 0 G Approach lighting is switched on with the Headlamp pattern, left-hand traffic. remote control key, see page 41, and is used Headlamp control for adjusting headlamp pattern. to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. Normal position – the headlamp pattern is When the function is activated with the remote correct for the country in which the car was control the parking lamps, direction indicator delivered. lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate light- Adapted position – designed for opposite ing, inner roof lamps and courtesy lighting are headlamp pattern. switched on. The length of time for which the approach light- WARNING ing should be kept on can be set under Car The headlamps must be handled with 2 5

settings Light settings Approach light 1

1 extreme care due to the Xenon lamp being 2 0 duration . For a description of the menu sys- G supplied from a high-voltage unit. tem, see page 118. Headlamp pattern, right-hand traffic. The country in which the car is delivered deter- The headlamp pattern must be adjusted to mines whether normal position is designed for avoid dazzling oncoming motorists and can be right or left-hand traffic. set for right or left-hand traffic. The correct pattern will also better illuminate the verge.

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 83 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Example 1 2. Transfer the template to a self-adhesive If a car that is delivered in Sweden shall be waterproof material and cut it out. Also driven in the UK then the headlamps must be mark out the red dots. set to the adjusted position, see preceding 3. Position the self-adhesive templates so illustration. that the red dots correspond with the dots Example 2 on the headlamp lenses that form refer- A car that is delivered in the UK is designed for ence points, see the following illustrations. 03 left-hand traffic and is driven there with the headlamps in normal position, see preceding illustration. Halogen headlamps The headlamp pattern for halogen headlamps is readjusted by masking the headlamp lens. The headlamp pattern may not be as good. Masking the headlamps 1. Copy the A and B templates for left-hand drive cars or the C and D templates for right-hand drive cars with a scale of 1:2, see page 85. Use a photocopier with a zoom function for example: • A = LHD Right (left-hand drive, right lens) • B = LHD Left (left-hand drive, left lens) • C = RHD Right (right-hand drive, right lens) • D = RHD Left (right-hand drive, left lens)

83 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 84 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Masking the halogen headlamps

03 5 2 0 3 3 0 G

Upper row: masking left-hand drive cars, templates A and B. Lower row: masking right-hand drive cars, templates C and D.

84 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 85 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Lighting

Templates for halogen headlamps

03 5 5 1 1 2 0 G

85 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 86 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

Windscreen wipers Continuous wiping Activating and setting the sensitivity The wipers sweep at normal speed. When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the remote control key in position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch The wipers sweep at high speed. must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep. 03 IMPORTANT Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button Before activating the wipers during winter - . The windscreen wipers make one ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen sweep. in and that any snow or ice on the wind- Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to make 3 6

6 screen (and rear window) is scraped away. 8 1

0 an extra sweep. G Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensi- Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers. IMPORTANT tivity and downward for lower sensitivity. (An Rain sensor, on/off Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- turned upward.) Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating. Deactivating Windscreen wipers off Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the but- Move the stalk switch to position 0 to ton or move the stalk switch down to switch off the windscreen wipers. Rain sensor * The rain sensor automatically starts the wind- another wiper program. Single sweep screen wipers based on how much water it The rain sensor is automatically deactivated Raise the stalk switch and release to detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of when the key is removed from the ignition make one sweep. the rain sensor can be adjusted using the switch or five minutes after the ignition has thumbwheel. been switched off. Intermittent wiping When the rain sensor is activated a light in the Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when inter- button the rain sensor symbol is shown mittent wiping is selected. in the right-hand display in the combined instrument panel.

86 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 87 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

IMPORTANT The windscreen wipers will make several more Wiper and washer, rear window sweeps once the stalk switch has been The windscreen wipers could start and be released. The headlamps are washed alter- damaged in an automatic car wash. Deac- nately to prevent light intensity being reduced. tivate the rain sensor while the car is running or the remote control key is in position I or II . The symbol in the combined instrument NOTE panel and the lamp in the button go out. One headlamp is washed at a time. 03

Washing the headlamps and windows Heated washer nozzles * The washer nozzles are heated automatically 2 3 6 7

in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid 1 0 freezing solid. G High-pressure headlamp washing * Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a Rear window wiper – continuous speed large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at every Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow fifth windscreen wash cycle. in the illustration above) to initiate rear window washing and wiping. 1 0 4 9

1 Wiper – reversing 0 G Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen Washing function. wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping 1. The function stops when reverse gear Washing the windscreen is disengaged. Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp If the rear window wiper is already on at con- washers. tinuous speed, no change is made.

1 This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 88 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Wipers and washing

NOTE On cars with rain sensor, the rear window wiper is activated with reversing, if the sensor is activated and it is raining.

88 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 89 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

General Power windows WARNING Laminated glass Make sure that children or other passengers The glass is reinforced which pro- are not in danger of becoming trapped in vides better protection against any way when closing the windows, in par-

8 ticular when the remote control key is used.

2 0 break-ins and improved sound insu-

G lation in the passenger compartment. 03 The windscreen and other windows * have lami- WARNING nated glass. If there are children in the car, remember to Water and dirt-repellent coating * always switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the remote control 6

Windows are treated with a coating 1 5

8 key if the driver leaves the car. 1 0

that improves the view in difficult G weather conditions. Maintenance, see page 264. Driver's door control panel. Operating Switch for electric child safety locks* and IMPORTANT disengaging rear power window buttons, see page 55. Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. Use the defroster to Rear window controls remove ice from the mirrors. An ice scraper could scratch the mirror glass! Front window controls

WARNING Check that none of the rear seat passengers 7 1 5

is in danger of becoming trapped in any way 8 1 0 caught when closing the windows from the G driver's door. Operating the power windows. Operating without auto Operating with auto

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 90 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

All power windows can be operated using the Operating with auto Door mirrors control panel in the driver's door. Each control Move one of the controls up/down to the end panel in the other doors can only control its position and release it. The window runs auto- own respective power window. The power win- matically to its end position. dows can only be controlled with one control Remote control and central locking panel at a time. buttons 03 In order that the power windows can be used All side windows can be opened/closed auto- the remote control key must be in position I or matically with the remote control key or the II . After the car has been running the power central locking buttons: windows can be operated for several minutes ± Press and hold the lock button until the

even when the remote control key has been 8 1 5

windows start to open/close. To interrupt 8 1 removed, but not however after the door has 0 opening/closing, press the lock button G been opened. again. Door mirror controls. Closing of the windows is stopped and the window is opened if anything prevents its Resetting Adjusting movement. It is possible to force the pinch pro- If the battery is disconnected then the function 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door tection when closing has been interrupted, e.g. for automatic opening must be reset so that it mirror or the R button for the right-hand with ice, by continuously holding the button up can work correctly. door mirror. The light in the button illumi- until the window is closed. The pinch protec- 1. Gently raise the front section of the button nates. tion is reactivated after a brief pause. to raise the window to its end position and 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the hold it there for one second. centre. NOTE 2. Release the button briefly. 3. Press the L or R button again. The light One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise should no longer be illuminated. when the rear windows are open is to also 3. Raise the front section of the button again open the front windows slightly. for one second. WARNING Operating without auto WARNING The mirrors are the wide angle type for opti- Move one of the controls up/down gently. The Resetting must be carried out to ensure that mum surveillance. Objects may appear fur- power windows move up/down as long as the pinch protection works. ther away than they actually are. control is held in position.

90 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 91 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

Retractable power door mirrors * Angling the door mirror when parking Home safe and approach lighting The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving The door mirror can be angled down for the The light on the door mirrors illuminates when in narrow spaces: driver to view the side of the road when parking approach lighting or home safe lighting is for example. selected, see page 81. 1. Press down the L and R buttons at the same time. ± Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button. Rear window and door mirror 2. Release them after approximately one sec- defrosters 03 ond. The mirrors automatically stop in the When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror fully retracted position. automatically returns to its original position after about 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L the button labelled L or R respectively and R buttons at the same time. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended posi- Automatic retraction when locking tion. When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are auto- Storing the position * matically retracted/extended. The mirror positions are stored in the key memory when the car has been locked with the The function can be activated/deactivated

under Car settings Fold mirr. when 1 remote control key. When the car is unlocked 4 3 1 2 0 with the same remote control key the mirrors locking . For a description of the menu system, G and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions see page 118. when the driver's door is opened. Resetting to neutral Use the defroster to quickly remove misting The function can be activated/deactivated Mirrors that have been moved out of position and ice from the rear window and the door mir- under Car Key memory Seat & mirror by an external force must be reset electrically rors. to the neutral position for electric retracting/ positions . For a description of the menu sys- Press the button once to start simultaneous extending to work correctly: tem, see page 118. rear window and door mirror defrosting. The 1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R but- light in the button indicates that the function is tons. active. Defrosting is deactivated automatically and its duration is controlled by the outside 2. Fold them out again with the L and R but- temperature. tons. The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 92 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

The rear window is demisted/defrosted auto- dimming with the dimming control when lights matically if the car is started in an outside tem- from behind are distracting: perature lower than +7 °C. 1. Use dimming by moving the control in Automatic defrosting can be selected under towards the passenger compartment. Climate settings Auto. rear defroster . 2. Return to normal position by moving the Select between On or Off . For a description of 03 control towards the windscreen. the menu system, see page 118. Automatic dimming * Interior rearview mirror Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control is not available in mirrors with automatic dimming. 2 4 3 1 2 0 G

Control for dimming.

Manual dimming Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 93 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Power sunroof *

General Open manually by pulling the control back- Vertical opening The sunroof controls are located in the roof wards to the point of resistance for manual panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically at opening. The sunroof moves to maximum open the rear edge and horizontally. Key position I or position as long as the button is kept II is required for the sunroof to be opened. depressed. Closing Horizontal opening Close manually by pushing the control for- 03 wards to the point of resistance for manual closing. The sunroof moves to closed position as long as the button is kept depressed. 0 0 9 8 2 0

WARNING G

Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed. Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge. The sunroof's pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing, not Open by pressing the rear edge of the con- manual. trol upward. 3 2 8

7 Close by pulling the rear edge of the con- 1 0 G Close automatically by pressing the control to trol down. Horizontal opening, backward/forward. the position for automatic closing and then Opening, automatic release it. The power supply to the sunroof is switched off Opening, manual by removing the remote control key from the Closing, manual ignition switch.

Closing, automatic WARNING Opening If there are children in the car: For maximum sunroof opening, move the con- Remember to always switch off the power trol back to the position for automatic opening supply to the sunroof by removing the and release. remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 94 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Power sunroof *

Closing using the remote control key or Pinch protection central locking button The sunroof's pinch protection function is triggered if it is blocked by an object during automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will stop and automatically open to the previous position. 03 5 4 3 1 2 0 G

One long press on the lock button closes the sunroof and all the windows, see pages 41 and 50. The doors and the tailgate are locked. To interrupt closing, press the lock button again.

WARNING If the sunroof is closed using the remote control key, check that no one is in danger of becoming trapped in any way.

Sunscreen The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automatically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the handle and slide the screen forward to close it.

94 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 95 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Petrol and diesel engines 2. Hold the clutch pedal fully depressed 1. WARNING Depress the brake pedal in cars with automatic gearbox. Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the 3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button car is being towed. The steering lock could and then release it. be activated which would mean that the car cannot be steered. NOTE Never remove the remote control key with 03 the Keyless drive* function from the car A certain delay may occur for cars with the while driving or during towing. 2.0D diesel engine before engine starting begins – during this time the display shows 6 2

1 Engine preheating .

1 NOTE 2 0 G The idling speed can be noticeably higher Ignition switch with remote control key, start and The starter motor works until the engine has than normal for certain engine types during stop button (for more information, see page 71 ). started, but for no longer than 10 seconds (die- cold starting. This is so that the emissions sel up to 60 seconds). system can reach normal operating tem- IMPORTANT perature as quickly as possible, which min- If the engine has not started after 10 seconds, imises exhaust emissions and protects the Do not insert the remote control key back- try again by holding in the START/STOP environment. wards! ENGINE button until the engine starts. Grip the end with the detachable key blade, Keyless drive see page 44. WARNING Follow steps 2–3 for starting petrol and diesel Always remove the remote control key from engines. 1. For cars with remote control key, insert the the ignition switch when leaving the car, remote control key into the ignition switch. especially if there are children in the car. NOTE Gently push in the key until it is pulled in. One precondition for starting the car is that one of the car's remote control keys with the keyless drive* function is located inside the passenger compartment or the cargo area.

1 If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the car. ``

95 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 96 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine

Steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch 2 and activated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch. Activate the steering lock when leaving the car 03 to reduce the risk of car theft.

2 On cars with Keyless drive* the steering lock is deactivated when the start button is pressed in for the first time. The steering lock is activated when the engine is switched off and the driver's door is opened.

96 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 97 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine – Flexifuel

General information about starting Engine block heater * this reason you should aim to use the engine with Flexifuel block heater throughout the winter months. The engine is started in the same way as in a petrol-engined car. WARNING The engine block heater is powered by high In the event of starting difficulties voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an electric engine block heater and its electrical 03 If the engine does not start at the first start connections must only be carried out by an attempt: authorised Volvo workshop. • Make further attempts to start with the START/STOP ENGINE button. NOTE If the engine still does not start Points to remember for carrying reserve 4 5

The outside temperature is lower than +5 °C: 7

9 fuel: 1 0 1. Connect the engine block heater for at G In the event of stalling due to an empty fuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel can least 1 hour. Electrical input to the engine block heater. may make the engine difficult to start in 2. Make further attempts to start with the When the temperature is expected to be lower extreme cold. This is avoided by filling the START/STOP ENGINE button. than –10 °C and the car has been refuelled with reserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol. bioethanol E85, an engine block heater should IMPORTANT be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol starting of the engine. If the engine does not start despite repeated E 85 fuel, see page 204 and 279. start attempts, contact an authorised Volvo The lower the temperature, the longer the time workshop. required with the engine block heater. At -20 °C the heater should be used for approx. 3 hours. Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine block heater*. Starting and driving with a pre- heated engine involves significantly lower emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 98 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine – Flexifuel

Fuel adaptation If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice versa) then the engine may run slightly unevenly for a time. For this reason it is important to allow the engine to accustom itself 03 (adapt) to the new fuel mixture. Adaptation takes place automatically when the car is driven for a short period at an even speed.

IMPORTANT After the fuel mixture in the tank has been changed an adaptation should be made by driving at an even speed for about 15 minutes.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected then a slightly longer period of driving is required for the adaptation as the memory for the electronics has been cleared.

98 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 99 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Starting the engine – external battery

Jump starting 5. Open the clips on the front cover of the 11. Remove the jump leads, first the black and battery in your car and remove the cover, then the red. Make sure that none of the see page 239. clamps on the black jump lead comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal 6. Connect the starter cable to the positive or the clamp connected to the red jump terminal on the battery in your car, lead. located under a folding plastic cover. 03 7. Connect one clamp from the black jump WARNING lead to the donor battery's negative termi- The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, nal . which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect a jump lead 7 4 3 1

2 incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery 0 IMPORTANT G explode. The battery contains sulphuric Connect the start cable carefully to avoid acid, which can cause serious burns. If the If the battery is flat then the car can be started short circuits with other components in the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or with current from another battery. engine compartment. clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical The following points are recommended when attention immediately. using a donor battery in order to avoid the risk 8. Connect the other clamp to an earthing of an explosion: point, (right-hand engine mounting at the top, the outer screw head) . Check that 0 1. Set the remote control key into position , the jump lead clamps are fixed securely so see page 71. that there are no sparks during the starting 2. Ensure that the donor battery is 12 volt. procedure. 3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch 9. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the off the donor car's engine in the other car engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly and ensure that the cars do not touch one higher than idle (1500 rpm). another. 10. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat- 4. Connect the red jump lead to the positive tery. Do not touch the crocodile clips dur- terminal on the donor battery . ing the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks forming.

99 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 100 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

Manual - five-speed Reverse gear inhibitor - five-speed Manual - six-speed

03 9 8 8 4 4 4 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 0 0 0 G G G

• Depress the clutch pedal fully during each The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil- • Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change. ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear change. • Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear during normal forward travel. • Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes. Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta- gear changes. • Follow the shifting pattern indicated. tionary. • Follow the shifting pattern indicated. For the best possible fuel economy, use the • To engage reverse gear, the gear lever For the best possible fuel economy, use the highest gear possible as often as possible. must first be put in position N. Reverse highest gear possible as often as possible. gear cannot therefore be engaged directly from fifth gear due to the reverse gear inhibitor.

100 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 101 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

Reverse gear inhibitor - six-speed Automatic gearbox, Geartronic IMPORTANT The car must be stationary when position P is selected.

Reverse (R) The car must be stationary when position R is 03 selected. Neutral position (N) No gear is engaged and the engine can be 9 0

4 started. Apply the parking brake if the car is 5 3 3 1 1 2 2 0 0 G stationary with the gear selector in position N. G Drive (D) The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil- The information display shows the position of D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse the gear selector using the following indica- down takes place automatically based on the gear during normal forward travel. tions: P, R, N, D, S, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see level of acceleration and speed. The car must Only engage reverse gear when the car is sta- page 65. be stationary when the gear selector is moved tionary. to position D from position R. Gear positions Geartronic – manual gear positions (M) Parking position (P) The driver can also change gear manually Select P when starting the engine or when the using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car is parked. The brake pedal must be car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal depressed to disengage the gear selector from is released. the P position. Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the the lever from position D to the right-hand end P position is engaged. Activate the electric position at M. The information display shifts the parking brake by pressing the button, see indication from D to one of the figures " 1- 6", page 109. depending on which gear is engaged just then, see page 65.

101 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 102 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to the use of a lower gear is prioritised, leading to regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is change up a gear and release the lever, which a delayed upshift. immediately engaged. This is known as kick- returns to its rest position at M. down. Sport mode is obtained by moving the lever Pull the lever back towards – (minus) to change from D position to the right-hand end position If the accelerator is released from the kick- down a gear and release the lever. at M. The information display shifts the indica- down position, the gearbox automatically tion from D to S. changes up. 03 The manual gearshift mode M can be selected at any time while driving. Sport mode can be selected at any time while Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- driving. tion is needed, such as for overtaking. To return to automatic driving mode: move the lever to the left-hand end position at D. Geartronic - Winter mode Safety function Geartronic automatically shifts down if the It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox driver allows the speed to decrease lower than if 3rd gear is engaged manually. control program has a protective downshift a level suitable for the selected gear, in order inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func- 1.Depress the brake pedal and move the tion. to avoid jerking and stalling. gear lever from position D to the right-hand end position at M - the instrument panel Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- NOTE display shifts the indication from D to the down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing If the gearbox has a Sport programme then figure 1. happens if the driver still tries to shift down in the gearbox will only become manual after 2.Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever the lever has been moved forwards or back- forward towards + (plus) twice - the display this way at high engine speed – the original wards in its M position. The information dis- shifts the indication from 1 to 3. gear remains engaged. play then shifts the indication from S to 3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully. When kick-down is activated the car can show which of the gears 1–6 is engaged. change one or more gears at a time depending The gearbox "winter mode" means that the car on engine speed. The car changes up when the moves off with a lower engine speed and Geartronic - Sport mode (S) 1 engine reaches its maximum speed in order to reduced engine power on the drive wheels. The Sport programme provides sportier cha- prevent damage to the engine. racteristics and allows higher engine speed for Kick-down the gears. At the same time it responds more When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the quickly to acceleration. During active driving, way to the floor (beyond the position normally

1 Only on the 3.0 model.

102 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 103 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Gearboxes

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor Parking position ( P) Deactivating the automatic gear selector Stationary car with engine running: inhibitor Keep your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another position. Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock Parking position ( P) 03 To be able to move the gear selector from P to other gear positions, the brake pedal must be depressed and key position II must be activated, see page 71. 1 5 3 1 2 0 2 G Shiftlock – Neutral ( N) 5 3 1 2 If the gear selector is in the N position and the 0 G The gear selector can be moved forward and car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds back freely between N and D. Other positions (irrespective of whether the engine is running) If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat are locked with a latch that is released with the then the gear selector is locked. battery, the gear selector must be moved from inhibitor button on the gear selector. To be able to move the gear selector from N to the P position so that the car can be moved. With the inhibitor button depressed the lever another gear position, the brake pedal must be Lift away the rubber mat on the floor can be moved forwards or backwards between depressed and key position II must be acti- behind the centre console and open the P, R, N and D. vated, see page 71. hatch. Automatic gear selector inhibitor Fully insert the key blade. Press the key The automatic gearbox has special safety sys- blade down and keep it held down. Move tems: the gear selector from the P position. For information on the key blade, see Keylock page 44. To remove the remote control key from the ignition switch, the gear selector must be in the P position. The remote control key is locked in all other positions.

103 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 104 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

All-wheel drive – AWD *

All Wheel Drive is always engaged All Wheel Drive means that the car is driving on all four wheels at the same time. The power is automatically distributed between the front and rear wheels. An elec- tronically controlled clutch system distributes 03 the power to the wheels that have the best grip on the current road surface. This provides the best traction and prevents wheel spin. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels. All Wheel Drive improves driving safety in rain, snow and icy conditions.

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 105 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Foot brake

General may be felt in the brake pedal when this is NOTE The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If engaged and this is normal. When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- one brake circuit is damaged then this will A short test of the ABS system is made auto- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) mean that the brakes engage at a deeper level matically after the engine has been started the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the and harder pressure on the pedal is needed to when the driver releases the brake pedal. A brake pedal is released then all braking produce the normal braking effect. further automatic test of the ABS system may ceases. 03 The driver's brake pedal pressure is reinforced be made when the car reaches 40 km/h. The by a brake servo. test may be experienced as pulses in the brake Symbols in the combined instrument pedal. panel WARNING Cleaning the brake discs Symbol Specification The brake servo only works when the engine Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs is running. may result in delayed brake function. This delay Constant glow – Check the is minimised by cleaning the brake linings. brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and If the brake is used when the engine is switched Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road check for the cause of the brake off then the pedal will feel stiff and more force surfaces, prior to long-stay parking and after fluid loss. must be used to brake the car. the car has been washed. Carry this out by In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy braking gently during a short period while en Constant glow for 2 seconds load the brakes can be relieved by using engine route. when the engine is started – There was a fault in the brake braking. Engine braking is most efficiently used Emergency Brake Assistance if the same gear is used downhill as up. system's ABS function when Emergency Brake Assistance EBA ( Emergency the engine was last running. For more general information on heavy loads Brake Assistance) helps to increase brake on the car, see page 275. force and so reduce braking distance. The EBA system detects the driver's braking style and Anti-lock braking system increases brake force as necessary. The brake The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock force can be reinforced up to the level when the Braking System) which prevents the wheels ABS system is engaged. The EBA function is from locking during braking. This means the interrupted when the pressure on the brake ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to pedal is reduced. swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration

105 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 106 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Foot brake

WARNING

If and illuminate at the same time then a fault may have arisen in the brake system. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is nor- 03 mal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop and have the brake system checked. If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

106 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 107 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

General 1 Function NOTE HDC can be compared to an automatic engine HDC cannot be activated in an automatic brake. When you release the accelerator on gearbox with the gear selector in position downhill gradients the car is normally braked D. by means of the engine striving for low engine idling speeds, so-called engine braking. But the steeper the road and the more load there is Operation 03 in the car, the faster the car rolls despite engine HDC allows the car to roll at a maximum of braking. In order to then reduce speed the 10 km/h forwards with engine braking and driver has to assist using the footbrake. 7 km/h backwards. However, any speed within

6 the gear's speed register can be selected using 2

The function makes it possible to increase/ 4 7 1 0 reduce speed on steep downhill gradients, with G the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator a foot only on the accelerator pedal, without pedal is released, the car is braked quickly to using the footbrake. The brake system brakes HDC is engaged or disengaged using a switch 10 or 7 km/h respectively, irrespective of the itself and automatically provides a low and on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the hill's gradient and without the need for the foot- even speed, so allowing the driver to fully focus button illuminates when the function is brake. on steering. switched on. When HDC is operating the The brake lights come on automatically when HDC is particularly helpful on steep gradients symbol illuminates and the display the function is operating. The driver can brake with an uneven road surface and slippery sec- shows Hill descent control ON . or stop the car at any time by using the foot- tions. E.g. when launching a boat on a trailer brake. The function only operates in first gear position from a ramp. and in reverse gear. For an automatic gearbox, HDC is deactivated: gear position 1 must be selected, which is with the on/off button on the centre con- WARNING • shown with the figure 1 in the trip computer sole HDC does not work in all situations, but is display, see page 101. • if a gear higher than 1 is selected on a instead only intended to be supplementary manual gearbox assistance. • if a gear higher than 1 is selected on an The driver always has ultimate responsibility automatic gearbox, or if the gear selector that the car is driven safely. is moved to position D.

1 HDC is only available on the XC70 and is standard. ``

107 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 108 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Hill Descent Control (HDC)

The function can be disengaged at any time. If it takes place on a steep downhill gradient then the braking effect will not release directly, but slowly instead.

NOTE 03 When HDC is activated, engine response during acceleration seems slower than normal.

108 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 109 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Parking brake, electric How to apply the parking brake ing the control. When the control is released or An electric parking brake has the same appli- the accelerator pedal is depressed the braking cations as a manual parking brake, e.g. when is interrupted. starting uphill. NOTE Function In the event of emergency braking at speeds A faint electric motor noise can be heard when above 10 km/h a signal sounds during the 03 the parking brake is being applied. The noise braking procedure. can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake. Parking on a hill 4

If the car is stationary when the parking brake 5 3

1 If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels 2 0 is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. G away from the kerb. If it is applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts Parking brake control If the car is parked facing downhill, turn the on all four wheels. Brake function changes over 1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly. wheels towards the kerb. to the rear wheels when the car is almost sta- 2. Press the control. How to release the parking brake tionary. 3. Release the foot brake pedal and make Low battery voltage sure that the car is at a standstill position. If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied. • When parking the vehicle, always engage Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage 1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the gear selector in position P (for automatic is too low, see page 99. gearbox). The symbol in the combined instrument panel flashes until the parking brake is fully 9

applied. When the symbol illuminates the park- 5 3 1 2 0

ing brake is applied. G

In an emergency the parking brake can be Parking brake control applied when the vehicle is moving by depress-

109 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 110 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Cars with manual gearbox 2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition Cars with Keyless drive function Releasing manually switch. Release manually by pressing the START/ 1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition 3. Depress the brake pedal firmly. STOP ENGINE button, then depress the brake or clutch pedal and pull the control. switch. 4. Pull the control. 2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Releasing automatically Symbols 03 3. Pull the control. 1. Put the seatbelt on. Symbol Specification 2. Start the engine. Read the message on the infor- NOTE 3. Move the gear selector to position D or R mation display The parking brake can also be released and depress the accelerator. manually by depressing the clutch pedal A flashing symbol indicates that instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recom- the parking brake is applied. If mends the use of the brake pedal. NOTE the symbol flashes in any other For safety reasons, the parking brake is only situation then this means that a Releasing automatically released automatically if the engine is run- fault has arisen. Read the mes- ning and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The sage on the information display. 1. Start the engine. parking brake is released immediately on 2. Ease up the clutch and depress the accel- cars with automatic gearbox when the Messages erator. accelerator pedal is depressed and the gear selector is in position D or R. IMPORTANT Heavy load uphill It is possible to release the parking brake A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the automatically, even when the gear lever is in neutral position, if the engine is running. car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by depressing the control while driv- Cars with automatic gearbox ing off. Release the control when the engine Releasing manually achieves traction. 6 6 1 6

1. Put the seatbelt on. 1 0 G

110 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 111 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

Parking brake

Park brake not fully released - A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop. A warning signal sounds if you pull away with this error message. Parking brake not applied - A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied. 03 Try to apply and release. Contact a Volvo workshop if the message remains. The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged. Parking brake Service required - A fault has arisen. Contact a Volvo workshop if the fault remains. If the car has to be parked before the fault has been rectified then the wheels must be turned as if parking on a hill and 1st gear engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be in position P (automatic gearbox). Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop due to the design of the electric parking brake.

111 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 112 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink EU *

General NOTE WARNING HomeLink is designed to be inoperable if If HomeLink is used to operate a garage the car is locked from the outside. door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in Save the original remote controls for future motion. programming (e.g. for purchasing a new car). Do not use the HomeLink remote control for 03 any garage door that does not have safety Erase the programming for the buttons stop and safety reverse. The garage door when selling the car. must react immediately when it detects that Metallic sun visors should not be used in something is preventing its movement, and cars equipped with HomeLink. This could stop directly and reverse. A garage door 1 7 4

9 have a negative effect on the HomeLink without these characteristics could cause 2 0 G function. personal injury. For further information, ring the HomeLink Hotline: 008000 466 354 65 (free of charge). They can also be contacted HomeLink is a programmable remote control Operation which can control up to three different devices via the Internet: www.homelink.com. When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be (e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light- used in place of the separate original remote ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so controls. Programming for the first time replace their remote controls. HomeLink is The first step erases the memory in HomeLink supplied built into the left-hand sun visor. Press the programmed button to activate the and must not be carried out when only one garage door, alarm system etc. The indicator HomeLink's panel consists of three program- individual button is being reprogrammed. lamp illuminates for the time that the button is mable buttons and one indicator lamp. kept depressed. 1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash- NOTE ing indicates that HomeLink is set in "learn In the event that the ignition is not activated, mode" and is ready to be programmed. HomeLink operates for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened. 2. Position the original remote control 2-8 cm from HomeLink. Monitor the indicator lamp. The original remote controls can of course be used in parallel with HomeLink.

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 113 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink EU *

The particular distance that is required and indicates that the device has a "roll- Programming individual buttons between the original remote control and ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- To reprogram an individual button, proceed in HomeLink depends on the programming of ilar is not activated when the pro- accordance with the following: the device in question. Perhaps several grammed HomeLink button is 1. Depress the required button on HomeLink attempts will be required at different dis- depressed. Continue the programming and do not release until step 3 has been tances. Maintain each position for approx. in accordance with the following. completed. 15 seconds before trying a new one. 5. Locate the "programming button 1" on the 03 2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink 3. Depress the button for the original remote receiver for the garage door for example, starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds, control and the button to be programmed normally located close to the antenna's position the original remote control 2-8 cm on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- from HomeLink. Monitor the indicator release the buttons until the indicator lamp culty in finding the button, look in the man- lamp. has changed over from slow to rapid flash- ufacturer's manual or call the HomeLink ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful Hotline: 008000 466 354 65 (free of The particular distance that is required programming. charge). They can also be contacted via between the original remote control and the Internet: www.homelink.com HomeLink depends on the programming of 4. Test the programming by depressing the the device in question. Perhaps several programmed button on HomeLink and 6. Depress and release the "programming attempts will be required at different dis- watching the indicator lamp: button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried tances. Maintain each position for approx. • Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- out within this period. 15 seconds before trying a new one. minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates 7. Depress the programmed button on 3. Depress the button on the original remote that the programming is complete. The HomeLink, while the "programming but- control. The indicator lamp will start to garage door, gate or similar should now ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for flash. When the flashing has changed over be activated when the programmed approx. 3 seconds and then release. from a slow to a rapid flashing - release HomeLink button is depressed. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming. • Glow not constant: The indicator lamp up to 3 times to conclude the program- flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds ming. 4. Test the programming by depressing the and then changes over to a constant programmed button on HomeLink and glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- watching the indicator lamp: ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds

1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 113 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 114 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

HomeLink EU *

• Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- seconds and the next step must be carried minates with a constant glow when the out within this period. button is kept depressed, this indicates 7. Depress the programmed button on that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now HomeLink, while the "programming but- be activated when the programmed ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for HomeLink button is depressed. approx. 3 seconds and then release. 03 Repeat the press/hold/release sequence Glow not constant: The indicator lamp • up to 3 times to conclude the program- flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds ming. and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- Erasing programming ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds It is only possible to erase the programming for and indicates that the device has a "roll- all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- buttons. ilar is not activated when the programmed HomeLink button is ± Depress the two outer buttons and do not depressed. Continue the programming release until the indicator lamp starts to in accordance with the following. flash after approx. 20 seconds. 5. Locate the "programming button 2" on the > HomeLink is now set in so-called "learn receiver for the garage door for example, mode" and is ready to be programmed normally located close to the antenna's once more, see page 112. bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- culty in finding the button, look in the manufacturer's manual or call the HomeLink Hotline: 008000 466 354 65 (free of charge). They can also be contacted via the Internet: www.homelink.com 6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 115 henrikrosenqvist

03 Your driving environment

115 16 h V enrikosqv 70/XC * O ptio n/ac (Y285/ es Fuel-drivn and Fuel-drivn Cl Men Trip A RS Co Co Dri Distanc BLI Bl Dri Bui Co P A DS Cr A st udio a dapti dapti ory ueto imat uise Y381); rk ver ver mpas*. mfo lison E TC lt-i S* , pasengr us co - for Asi n – e sytem Rear Aler Aler ve ng – rt mpute c and e m *phone th Blind *ontrl co St insde 9; ore Warnig st* Ale c drivng ha t t abilty ruise ntrol 3 Syste Syste S me ad engi . . informat rt *ndsfre eat . . r. . . . . S ...... sage pot . . the comp itonal . . con ...... an Enterai . . . ch m m ...... with ...... on, Inf pasengr bl d arctei . . . . trol* . . . . . - – . . . . . ock ...... artmen tracion LDW* . . ormati DAC* . . . s ...... heat . . e ...... A ...... uto ...... Introduc . . . . heatr ...... ment ...... *er ...... sti ...... on . . *Brake ...... cs ...... contr heat ...... compart ...... System . . . . sytem ...... ion...... er* ...... ol ...... sytem ...... - ...... ent ...... Dua ...... l ...... Scren ...... * ...... 152 . .. .. 154 . 13 123 18 147 134 135 18 172 158 178 185 167 18 164 193 175 157 156 15 20 8-0325T 08: 16:38+0 0; Pa ge 1 6 G02090 8 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 117 henrikrosenqvist

COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE 04 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 118 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Centre console Steering wheel keypad Lock settings , which presupposes that fol- Some functions are controlled from the centre lowing is carried out before: console via the menu system or via the keypad 1. Press MENU . in the steering wheel. Each function is described under its respective section. 2. Scroll to Menu and press ENTER . The current menu level is shown at the top right 3. Scroll to Submenu and press ENTER . of the centre console's display. The navigation button can be used instead of ENTER and EXIT when navigating the menu Centre console controls hierarchy. The right-hand arrow is equal to ENTER and the left-hand arrow to EXIT . 3 6

04 3 1 2 0 The menu options are numbered and can also G be selected directly with the numerical keypad ENTER * (only 1 – 9). EXIT * Menu overview The phone and audio sources have different Navigation buttons – up/down. main menus. The following menus are included If the steering wheel keypad has ENTER and in all main menus: 0 6 3

1 EXIT then these buttons, and the navigation 2

0 Car Key memory G buttons, have the same functions as the con- Seat & mirror positions* Centre console with information display and controls in the centre console. trols for menus. Car settings Search paths Navigation button – scrolls and selects Access to some functions is provided directly Fold mirr. when locking* among menu options via the function buttons and some are reached Collision warning settings* ENTER – selects menu options via the menu system. Information MENU – leads to the menu system The search paths to the menu system's functions are stated in the form: Car settings Light settings EXIT – leads back one step in the menu Lock settings structure. A long press leads out from the menu system.

118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 119 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Reduced Guard 1 TP (Traffic information) Main menu AUX Parking camera settings* Radio text AUX input volume Steering force level* PTY (Program type) Audio settings Unit settings Advanced radio settings Main menu, Bluetooth Climate settings Audio settings Last 10 missed calls Automatic blower adjust Main menu DAB * 3 Last 10 received calls Auto. rear defroster Main menu CD Last 10 dialled calls Recirculation timer Random Phone book 04 Reset climate settings Off Search Main menu AM Folder 4 Copy fr. mobile phone Audio settings 2 Disc 4 Bluetooth* Sound stage Single disc 5 Connect phone Equalizer front All discs 5 Change phone Equalizer rear CD settings Remove phone Auto. volume control Disc text* Phone settings Reset the audio settings News Call options Main menu FM TP (Traffic information) Sounds and volume FM settings Audio settings Synchronise phone book News

1 Certain models. 2 The menu option for audio settings is available in all audio sources. 3 See page 143. 4 Only in systems that allow the playback of MP3 and WMA format audio files. 5 Only in systems with CD changer. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 120 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Main menu, built-in phone Automatic answer Combined instrument panel Call register Voice mail number Last 10 missed calls Diversions Last 10 received calls Phone settings Last 10 dialled calls Network selection Erase list SIM security Call duration Edit PIN code Phone book Sounds and volume 4

04 6 3 1 2 0

New contact IDIS G

Search Reset Phone settings Information display and controls for menus. Copy all READ – access to message list and mes- Erase SIM sage confirmation. Erase phone Thumbwheel – browse between menu options. Memory status RESET – reset the active function. Used in Messages certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each respective Read function. Write new The menus shown on the information displays Message settings in the combined instrument panel are controlled with the left-hand stalk switch. The Call options menus shown depend on key position, see Send my number page 71. If a message appears then this must be acknowledged with READ for the menus to Call waiting be shown.

120 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 121 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

6 Menu overview Message Message Specification To empty fuel tank Stop safely Stop and switch off the Average engine. Serious risk of Instantaneous damage. Contact an Average speed authorised Volvo workshop. Lane departure warning Stop engine Stop and switch off the Tyre pressure Calibration engine. Serious risk of Current speed damage. Contact an 5

6 04

3 authorised Volvo work- 1

Park heat timer 1/2 2 0 G shop. Park vent timer 1/2 Text message in the information display. Service urgent Have the car checked Park timer mode When a warning, information or indicator sym- by an authorised Volvo Direct start Park heat bol illuminates, a corresponding message workshop immediately. appears on the information display. An error Direct start Park el.heat Service Have the car checked message is stored in a memory list until the required by an authorised Volvo Direct start Park vent fault is rectified. workshop as soon as Additional heat auto Press READ to acknowledge and browse possible. Rest heat start between the messages. See manual Read the owner's man- DSTC NOTE ual. If a warning message appears while you are Book time for Time to book regular using the trip computer, the message must maintenance service at an authorised be read (press READ ) before the previous Volvo workshop. activity can be resumed.

6 Certain menu options *. ``

121 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 122 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Menus and messages

Message Specification Time for regular Time for regular service maintenance at an authorised Volvo workshop. The timing is determined by the number of kilometres driven, number of months since the last service, engine running time and oil grade. 04 Maintenance If the service intervals overdue are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for service.

Temporarily A function has been OFF temporarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again.

Power save The audio system is mode switched off to save energy. Charge the battery.

122 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 123 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

General Sensor location air conditioning can be temporarily switched • The sun sensor* is located on the top side off. There may then be a temporary increase in Air conditioning of the dashboard. temperature. The car is equipped with Electronic Climate The temperature sensor for the passenger Control* (ECC) or Electronic Temperature Con- • Condensation compartment is located below the climate In warm weather, condensation from the air trol (ETC). The climate control system cools or control panel. heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the pas- conditioning may drip under the car. This is senger compartment. • The outside temperature sensor is located normal. on the door mirror. NOTE • The humidity sensor * is located in the inte- Ice and snow rior rearview mirror. Remove ice and snow from the climate control The air conditioning can be switched off, but system air intake (the grille between the bonnet 04 to ensure the best possible climate comfort and the windscreen). in the passenger compartment and to pre- NOTE vent the windows from misting, it should Do not cover or block the sensors with Fault tracing and repair always be on. clothing or other objects. Entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate control system to an authorised Volvo work- Actual temperature Side windows and sunroof shop only. The temperature you select corresponds to the To ensure that the air conditioning works opti- Refrigerant physical experience with reference to factors mally, the side windows, and sunroof if appro- The climate control system contains R134a such as air speed, humidity and solar radia- priate, should be closed. tion* etc. in and around the car. refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo- Misting windows rine, which means that it is harmless to the The system includes a sun sensor* which Remove misting on the insides of the windows ozone layer. Have an authorised Volvo work- detects on which side the sun is shining into by primarily using the defroster function. shop carry out the filling/changing of refriger- the passenger compartment. This means that ant. the temperature can differ between the right To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win- and left-hand air vents despite the controls dows with normal window cleaning agent. Total airing function being set for the same temperature on both The function opens/closes all side windows sides. Temporary shut-off of the air simultaneously and can be used for example to conditioning quickly air the car during hot weather, see When the engine requires full power, e.g. for full page 42. acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer, the

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 124 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Passenger compartment filter the fan blows will be gradually reduced • Fan speed in automatic mode*, see All air entering the car's passenger compart- until the car is 4 years old. page 127. ment is cleaned with a filter. This must be • Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). A fully • Recirculation timer for passenger com- replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo automatic system that cleans the air in the partment air, see page 128. Service Programme for the recommended passenger compartment from contami- • Automatic rear window defrosting, see replacement intervals. If the car is used in a nants such as particles, hydrocarbons, page 91. severely contaminated environment, it may be nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. necessary to replace the filter more often. All climate control system functions are set to Use of tested materials in the interior original position with RESET via the display. NOTE equipment. The materials have been developed in order to Air distribution 04 There are different types of passenger com- minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger partment filter. Make sure that the correct compartment and they contribute to making filter is fitted. the passenger compartment easier to keep clean. The carpets in both the passenger com- Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) partment and the cargo area are removable This option keeps the passenger compartment and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning clear of allergy and asthma inducing sub- agents and car care products recommended stances. For more information on CZIP, see the by Volvo, see page 264. brochure included with the purchase of the car. The following is included: NOTE 9 9 6 7

An enhanced fan function that means that 1 • In cars with CZIP the IAQS air filter must be 0 the fan starts when the car is opened with replaced every 15000 km or once per year. G the remote control key. The fan fills the In cars without CZIP the IAQS air filter must passenger compartment with fresh air. The be replaced at the normal service. The incoming air is divided between 20different function starts when required and is dis- vents in the passenger compartment. engaged automatically after a time or when Menu settings Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO one of the passenger compartment doors It is possible to change the default settings for mode*. is opened. The time interval during which three of the climate control system's functions If necessary it can be controlled manually, see via the centre console, see page 118: page 129.

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 125 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Air vents in the dashboard Air vents in the door pillars Climate control Electronic Temperature Control, ETC 7 8 6 6

3 3 04 1 1 2 2 0 0 G G 3 2 7 7 1 0 Open Open G

Closed Closed Fan Lateral airflow Lateral airflow Air distribution Vertical airflow Vertical airflow Heated front seats, left-hand side Aim the outer vents at the side windows to Aim the vents at the windows to remove mist- Heated front seats, right-hand side remove misting. ing. Temperature control A certain air flow always comes from the vents Aim the vents into the passenger compartment in order to maintain a good climate in the pas- to maintain a comfortable climate in the rear AC ON /OFF – Air conditioning On/Off senger compartment. seat. Rear window and door mirror defrosters, Remember that small children may be sensitive see page 91 to air flows and draughts. Max. defroster Recirculation

125 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 126 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC Max. defroster • Comfort level III: press the button once for maximum output – three lamps illuminate. Recirculation/Air quality system • Comfort level II: press the button twice for Temperature control, left-hand side lower output – two lamps illuminate. • Comfort level I: press the button three times for the lowest output – one lamp illu- Operation minates. Ventilated front seats * Press the button four times to switch off the Ventilated front seats can only function – no lamps illuminate. be specified when ECC is 1 7

04 3 installed in the car. The venti- 1 NOTE 2 0 G lation system consists of fans The seat ventilation should be used carefully in the seats and backrests Ventilated front seats*, left-hand side by people sensitive to draughts. Comfort that draw air through the seat level one is recommended for long-term Fan upholstery. The cooling effect use. increases the cooler the passenger compart- Heated front seats, left-hand side ment air becomes. IMPORTANT Air distribution The ventilation is regulated from the climate control and takes seat temperature, solar radi- The seat ventilation cannot be started when Heated front seats, right-hand side ation and outside temperature into considera- passenger compartment temperature is below 5 °C. This is to avoid chilling anyone tion. AUTO sitting in the seat. The ventilation can be used at the same time Ventilated front seats*, right-hand side as seat heating. For example, the function can Temperature control, right-hand side be used to dry damp from clothing. AC ON /OFF – Air conditioning On/Off The ventilation system can be activated when the engine is running. There are three comfort Rear window and door mirror defrosters, levels that produce different cooling and dehu- see page 91 midification outputs:

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 127 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Fan 1 Air distribution For a description of the menu system, see Turn the knob to increase or The figure consists of three page 118. decrease fan speed. If AUTO buttons. When the buttons is selected then fan speed is are pressed a lamp in front of Temperature control regulated automatically. The the respective part of the fig- ECC: The temperatures on previously set fan speed is ure illuminates and shows the driver and passenger disengaged. which air distribution is sides can be set independ- selected, see page 129. ently. ETC: The whole of the pas- NOTE 1 Auto senger compartment is regu- If the fan is fully disengaged the air condi- The Auto function automati- lated using the knob. tioning is not engaged which may result in a cally regulates temperature, 04 risk of misting windows. air conditioning, fan speed, When the car is started, the most recent setting recirculation, and air distribu- is resumed. Heated seats tion. NOTE Front seats The function automatically Press the button once for the regulates temperature, air conditioning, fan Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by highest heat level – three speed, recirculation, and air distribution. selecting a higher/lower temperature than the actual temperature required. lamps illuminate. If you select one or more manual functions, the Press the button twice for a other functions continue to be controlled auto- AC – Air conditioning on/off lower heat level – two lamps matically. The air quality sensor is engaged and ON: The air conditioning is illuminate. all manual settings are switched off when AUTO is pressed. The display shows AUTO controlled by the system's Press the button three times for the lowest heat CLIMATE . Auto function. This way, level – one lamp illuminates. incoming air is cooled and Fan speed in automatic mode can be set under Press the button four times to switch off the dehumidified. heat – no lamps illuminate. Climate settings Automatic blower adjust . Select between Low , Normal or High .

1 Only applies to ECC. ``

127 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 128 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

OFF: When the defroster function is activated Recirculation/Air quality system Air quality system * the air conditioning is switched on automati- Recirculation The air quality system sepa- cally (can be switched off using the AC button). When recirculation is rates gases and particles to engaged the right-hand reduce the levels of odours Defroster and pollution in the passenger Used to quickly remove mist- orange light in the button illuminates*. The function is compartment. If the outside ing and ice from the wind- air is contaminated then the screen and side windows. Air selected to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the air intake is closed and the air flowing to the windows. The is recirculated. When the AUTO button is light in the defroster button passenger compartment. The air in the passenger compartment is recircula- depressed the air quality sensor is always illuminates when the function engaged. 04 is active. ted, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when this function is activated. If the air in the car Activating recirculation/air quality The following also takes place in order to pro- recirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist- sensor 2 vide maximum dehumidification in the passen- ing on the insides of the windows. Switch between the three ger compartment: Timer functions by pressing the but- • the air conditioning is automatically With the timer function activated the system ton repeatedly. engaged will exit manually activated recirculation mode • recirculation is automatically disengaged. according to a time that depends on the out- The air conditioning can be disengaged man- side temperature. This reduces the risk of ice, ually using the AC button. When the defroster misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the • The left-hand orange lamp illuminates – the function is switched off the climate control sys- function under Climate settings air quality sensor is disengaged. tem returns to the previous settings. Recirculation timer . For a description of the • The centre green lamp illuminates – recir- menu system, see page 118. culation not engaged, providing it is not required for cooling in hot weather. NOTE • The right-hand orange lamp illuminates – When Defroster is selected, recirculation is recirculation is engaged. always deactivated.

2 Only applies to ETC.

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 129 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

NOTE Activating recirculation Switch between recircula- The air quality sensor should always be tion 2 On/Off by pressing the engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment. button repeatedly. The lamp illuminates when recirculation Recirculation is limited in cold weather to is engaged. avoid misting. If the insides of the windows start misting up, disengage the air quality sensor, and the defroster functions for the windscreen, the side and the rear windows should also be used to demist the windows. 04

Air distribution table Air distribution Use Air distribution Use Air to windows. Some air To remove ice and mist- Air to the floor and win- To ensure comfortable flows from the air vents. ing quickly. dows. Some air flows conditions and good The air is not recirculated. from the dashboard air demisting in cold or Air conditioning is always vents. humid weather. engaged.

Air to windscreen and To prevent misting and Air to floor and from dash- In sunny weather with side windows. Some air icing in a cold and humid board air vents. cool outside tempera- flows from the air vents. climate, (not at too low fan tures. speed to enable this).

2 Only applies to ETC. ``

129 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 130 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Climate control

Air distribution Use Air distribution Use Airflow to windows and To ensure good comfort Air to floor. Some air flows To direct heat or cold to from dashboard air vents. in warm, dry weather. to the dashboard air vents the floor and windows.

Airflow to the head and To ensure efficient cool- Airflow to windows, from To provide cooler air chest from the dashboard ing in warm weather. dashboard air vents and along the floor or warmer 04 air vents. to the floor. air higher up in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

130 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 131 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater *

Fuel-driven heater Refuelling Battery and fuel If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel General information about the parking WARNING! ACHTUNG! level is too low, the parking heater will be AVERTISSEMENT! heater switched off automatically and a message The parking heater heats the engine and pas- appears on the information display. Acknowl- senger compartment and can be started edge the message by pressing the indicator directly or with the timer. stalk READ button once, see page 132. Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car IMPORTANT is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys- Repeated use of the parking heater com-

tem calculates when heating should be started 5 9 bined with short journeys may discharge the 3 04 1 2 0 based on the outside temperature. G battery and impair starting.

The heater cannot start if the outside tempera- Warning decal on fuel filler flap. The car should be driven for the same time ture exceeds 15 °C. At –10 °C or lower the as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace maximum running time of the parking heater is WARNING 50 minutes. the energy consumed by the heater when it Fuel which spills out can be ignited. Switch is used on a regular basis. WARNING off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel. The car must be outdoors when the parking Check the information display to see that heater is used. the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows NOTE Park heat ON . When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel hous- Parking on a hill ing, which is perfectly normal. If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 132 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater *

Operation Sym- Display Specification Direct start and immediate stop bol 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Direct start Park heat . Fuel The heater is heater ON switched on and run- 2. Press RESET to select between ON and

5 OFF .

G ning. ON : Parking heater switched on manually or Timer is Reminder that the with programmed timer. set for heater will start at

2 OFF : Parking heater switched off.

G Fuel the set time after the heater car has been left, Following the direct start of the heater it will be 4

04 6 3

1 when the remote

2 activated for 50 minutes. 0 G control key is removed from the Heating of the passenger compartment will READ button ignition switch. begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature. Thumbwheel Heater The heater has been RESET button stopped stopped by the car's NOTE Low bat- electronics in order For more information on the information dis- to facilitate starting The car can be started and driven while the tery parking heater is running. play and READ , see page 120. the engine.

Symbols and display messages Heater The heater has been stopped - stopped by the car's Setting the timer When one of the timer's settings or Low fuel electronics in order The time when the car shall be used and heated Direct start is activated, the infor- level to facilitate starting is specified with the timer. mation symbol in the combined instrument the engine and about Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2 . panel illuminates while the information display 50 km driving. shows an explanatory text and a further illuminated symbol. The table shows symbols and NOTE A display text clears automatically after a time display texts that appear. or after one press on the indicator stalk The time can only be programmed in key position I, see page 71. READ button.

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 133 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater *

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Park heat > The text OFF is shown with a constant timer 1 . glow and the heater is switched OFF. 2. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- A timer-started heater can be switched off in ing hours setting. accordance with the instructions in the section "Direct start and immediate stop", see 3. Select the required hour using the thumb- page 132. wheel. 4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- Clock/timer ing minutes setting. The heater's time is connected to the car's clock. 5. Select the required minute using the thumbwheel. 04 NOTE 6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting. All timer programming will be cleared if the 7. Press RESET to activate the timer. car's clock is reset. After setting Park heat timer 1 a second start time can be programmed with Park heat timer 2 by scrolling to it with the thumbwheel. Set the alternative time in the same way as Park heat timer 1 . Deactivating a timer-started heater A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro- ceed as follows: 1. Press READ . 2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text Park heat timer 1 or 2. > The text ON flashes on the display. 3. Press RESET .

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 133 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 134 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Fuel-driven additional heater *

Additional heater (diesel) NOTE When the additional heater is active there may be smoke from the right-hand wheel housing which is perfectly normal.

Auto mode or shutdown The additional heater can be switched off for short distances if required. 1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Additional heat auto

4 .

04 6 3 1 2 0 G 2. Press RESET to select between ON and OFF . READ button Thumbwheel RESET button In diesel-engined cars the additional heater may be required for achieving the correct temperature in the passenger compartment during cold weather. The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running. The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 135 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

General If the audio system is active when the engine is Steering wheel keypad The audio system can be equipped with differ- switched off then it is activated automatically ent options and different versions. There are next time the engine is started. three system versions: • Performance Overview • High Performance • Premium Sound The system version is shown in the display when the audio system is started. 9

9 04 3

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby 1 2 0 symbol are trademarks of Dolby G Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby Confirm selection in menu system, accept Surround Pro Logic II System is manufactured phone call. 8 9

under license from Dolby Laboratories 3 1 2 0 Licensing Corporation. G Lead up in menu system. Interrupt current function, end/refuse phone calls, clear Remote control key and key positions Input for external audio source (AUX, USB/ entered characters. The audio system can be used without the iPod*) Volume remote control key in the ignition switch for Steering wheel keypad 15 minutes at a time. A short press scrolls between CD tracks or Centre console control panel preset radio stations. A long press fast- NOTE winds CD tracks or searches radio stations Control panel with headphones socket* automatically. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch if the audio system is used when the engine is switched off. This is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessar- ily.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 135 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 136 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Rear control panel with headphones is automatic when the audio system is deacti- Store favourite functions with MY KEY socket vated or with a long press on MODE . Headphones with an impedance of Scroll/search forward and backward 16-32 ohm and sensitivity of 102 dB or higher are recommended for best sound reproduc- Short presses on are used to scroll between tion. CD tracks or preset radio stations. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD tracks or to search for radio stations automatically. Limitations • The audio source (FM, AM, CD etc.) played 2 5

04 back in the speakers cannot be controlled 7 7 1 0 from the rear control panel. G

Menus and MY KEY 1 1. Select the function to be stored in the menu. Only a selection of the functions can Some functions are controlled from the menu be stored. 0 0

4 system in the centre console. For more infor- 1 2 0 G mation on menus, see page 118. For informa- 2. Hold MY KEY depressed for more than tion on the audio system's functions together 2 seconds. Volume with Bluetooth TM handsfree or phone, see The following functions can be stored page 194. Scroll/search forward and backward with MY KEY: Audio source, activating CD/CD changer Random (CD changer) Headphones sockets (3.5 mm) • • News Activating/deactivating • TP The control panel is activated with MODE • Track information when the audio system is active. Deactivation

1 The MY KEY function is not available if the car is equipped with built-in phone as an option.

136 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 137 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

FM Audio functions low, medium or high. Select the level under • News Audio settings Auto. volume control . • TP External audio source audio volume • Radio text The AUX input can be used for connecting an • Search PTY MP3 player for example, see page 135. Show PTY text • NOTE AUDIO SETTINGS The audio quality may be impaired if the • Sound setting player is charged while the audio system is in AUX mode. In which case, avoid charging 2

Auto. volume control 0 04

• 4 1

2 the player via the 12 V socket. 0 Activate the stored function with a short press G on MY KEY . Centre console, controls for audio functions. Sometimes the AUX external audio source can Internal audio sources: AM, FM and CD be heard at a different volume to the internal audio sources. If the audio volume of the exter- External audio source. For connection, see nal audio source is too high then the sound page 135 quality can be impaired. Prevent this by adjust- Push button and knob controls for adjusting the input volume of the AUX input: ing the sound pattern 1. Set the audio system in AUX mode using Navigation button MODE and navigate with to AUX input Volume and on/off volume . 2. Turn the control or press / the Audio volume and automatic volume navigation button. control The audio system compensates for disrupting Audio controls noises in the passenger compartment by Press the control repeatedly to browse increasing the volume with the speed of the among the following listed options. car. The level of compensation can be set at Adjustment is made by turning the control.

137 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 138 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

NOTE Under Surround 3 channel stereo or Dolby This calibration takes into account loudspeak- Surround Pro Logic II can be activated by ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment Press MENU to access the audio settings. selecting 3-ch or Dpl2 respectively. This ena- acoustics, listener position etc. for each com- For more information, see page 118. bles the following options: bination of car model and audio system. Centre level * - Level for centre speaker. There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes • Bass - Bass level. • • Surround level * - Level for surround. into account the position of the volume control, • Treble - Treble level. radio reception and vehicle speed. • Fader – Balance between the front and Equalizer 2 The controls explained in these operating rear speakers. The equalizer can be used to adjust different frequency bands separately. instructions, e.g. Bass , Treble and • Balance – Balance between the left and Equalizer , are only intended for the user to be 04 right-hand speakers. 1. Go to Audio settings and select able to adapt the sound reproduction accord- • Subwoofer * - Bass speaker level. Turning Equalizer front or Equalizer rear . ing to personal taste. the control anticlockwise to MIN deac- The sound level for the wavelength is tivates the Subwoofer. The Subwoofer is adjusted with / on the navigation but- located as illustrated below. ton. Press / to select another wavelength. 2. Use ENTER to save or EXIT to close. Sound stage The sound experience can be optimised for the driver's seat* , both front seats or the rear seat. Select one of the options under Audio settings Sound stage .

Optimum sound reproduction 9 1 4 9

1 The audio system is calibrated for optimum 0 G sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing. • Surround * - Surround settings.

2 Certain audio levels

138 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 139 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

CD functions Start playback (CD changer) Pause If a CD position with a music CD is already If the volume is turned down completely, the selected when CD is pressed then playback CD player is stopped. The player is restarted starts automatically. Otherwise, select a disc when volume is increased. with the number buttons 1–6 or / on the 3 navigation button. Audio files The CD player also supports MP3 and WMA Insert a CD (CD changer) format audio files. 1. Select an empty position with the number buttons 1–6 or / on the navigation NOTE button. 3 Some copy protected audio files may not be

0 04 4 1 2

0 read by the player. G An empty position is marked on the display. The text Insert Disc shows that a Centre console, controls for CD functions. new disc can be inserted. The CD changer When a CD containing audio files is inserted CD eject can hold up to six CDs. into the player the disc's directory structure is read in. It may take a while before playback CD insert and eject slot 2. Insert a CD in the CD changer slot. starts depending on the quality of the disc. Navigation button for changing CD tracks Disc eject Navigation and playback A CD will stay in the ejected position for Fast-wind and change CD track If a disc containing audio files is inside the CD approx. 12seconds. Following which it is re- player then ENTER leads to the disc's direc- CD changer position selection* inserted in the player and playback continues. tory structure. The directory structure is navi- Scan CD Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but- gated in the same way as the audio system's ton. menu structure. Audio files have the symbol and directories have the symbol . Start playback (CD player) Eject all discs with a long press on the eject If a music CD is in the player when CD is button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by Start audio file playback with ENTER . pressed then playback is started automatically. disc. When the playback of a file is finished the play- Otherwise, insert a disc and press CD . back of the other files in the same directory continues. Directory change takes place auto-

3 High Performance and Premium Sound ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 139 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 140 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

matically when all files in the current directory • RANDOM means that the tracks from only Radio functions have been played back. one music CD are played RND ALL means that all tracks on all Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio • music CDs in the CD changer are played. files RANDOM FOLDER means that the audio Short presses / on the navigation button • files in a directory on the current CD are are used to scroll between CD tracks/audio played. files. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. The steering wheel keypad CD player can also be used for this purpose. Track If a normal music CD is being played, activate/ change can also be made by turning deactivate under Random . 4

04 0 4

TUNING . 1 2

If a disc with audio files is being played, acti- 0 G Scan CD vate/deactivate under Random Folder . Centre console, controls for radio functions. This function plays the first ten seconds of CD changer each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to acti- If a normal music CD is being played under Navigation button for tuning, automatic vate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue Random Single disc or Random All Cancel function in progress playback of the current CD track/audio file. discs . The option All discs only applies to the music CDs in the changer. Tuning, manual Random This function plays the tracks in random order. If a CD with audio files is being played, activate/ Scan wavelength The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol- deactivate instead under Random Folder . Preset storage, automatic led through in the normal way. If you select another CD the function is deactivated. Preset buttons and preset storage, manual NOTE Track information Select wavelength AM and FM (FM1 and It is only possible to scroll between random If track information is stored on a music CD FM2) CD tracks on the current disc. then it can be shown on the display. This also Tuning, automatic applies to MP3 and WMA files for Premium 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM . Different messages appear depending on Sound and High Performance. Activate/deac- which random function has been selected: tivate in CD mode under CD settings Track 2. Press / on the navigation button. information .

140 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 141 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Tuning, manual now be selected using the preset buttons. • Automatically switches to a stronger trans- 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM . Automatic preset storage can be cancelled mitter if reception in the area is poor. using EXIT . 2. Turn TUNING . • Searches for programme type, such as Auto mode is cancelled by pressing for exam- traffic information or news. Preset ple AUTO or FM . • Receives text information on current radio 10 station presets can be stored per wave- programme. Returning to Auto mode provides access to the length. FM has 2 memories for presets: FM1 autostored presets: and FM2 . The stored presets are selected NOTE using the preset buttons. 1. Press AUTO . Some radio stations do not use RDS or only Preset storage can be carried out manually or > Auto appears on the display. some if its functionality. automatically. 2. Press a preset button. 04 Preset storage, manual If a required programme type is located the Scan wavelength 1. Tune into a station. radio can switch stations interrupting the audio The function automatically searches the cur- source currently in use. For example, if the CD 2. Hold in a station preset button until the rent wavelength for strong stations. When a player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting message Channel stored appears on the station is found, it is played for approx. 8 sec- transmission is played at a preset volume, see display. onds before scanning is resumed. page 143. The radio returns to the previous Preset storage, automatic 1. Select wavelength using AM or FM . audio source and volume when the set pro- The function is especially useful in areas where gramme type is no longer broadcast. 2. Press SCAN . the radio stations and their frequencies are The programme functions alarm (ALARM), traf- SCAN appears on the display. Close using unfamiliar. The 10 strongest radio stations are fic information (TP), news (NEWS), and pro- SCAN or EXIT . stored automatically in a separate memory. gramme types(PTY) interrupt one another in 1. Select wavelength using FM or AM . RDS functions order of priority, where alarm has the highest priority and programme types has the lowest. 2. Hold in AUTO until Autostoring.. appears RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters For further programme interruption settings on the display. into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS (EON and REG), see page 143. Press EXIT to Once Autostoring.. disappears from the dis- radio the following functions: return to the interrupted audio source. play, the stations are stored. The radio continues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the Alarm display. The automatically stored presets can This function is used to warn of serious accidents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be ``

141 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 142 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The News from current/all stations If the radio finds any of the selected pro- message ALARM! appears on the display The radio can interrupt with news from only the gramme types, >| To seek appears on the when an alarm message is transmitted. set (current) station or from all stations. display. Traffic information – TP ± Go to FM settings Advanced radio ± To continue searching for another broad- This function allows traffic information sent settings News station to change. cast of the selected programme types, within a set station's RDS network to break press on the navigation button. through. The TP symbol indicates that the Programme types – PTY function is activated. If the set station can send The PTY function can be used to select differ- Display of programme type The programme type of the current station can traffic information then appears on the ent programme types, such as pop music and be shown on the display. display. serious classic. The PTY symbol indicates that 04 the function is active. This function allows pro- ± Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM ± Activate/deactivate under FM settings gramme types broadcast within a set station's settings PTY Show PTY TP . RDS network to break through. TP from current station/all stations 1. Activate in FM mode by selecting a pro- NOTE gramme type under FM settings PTY The radio can interrupt with traffic information Not all radio stations support display of pro- from only the set (current) station or from all Select PTY . gramme type. stations. 2. Deactivate by clearing the PTYs under FM ± Go to FM settings Advanced radio settings Clear all PTY . Radio text settings TP TP Station to change. Some RDS stations transmit information on PTY search programme content, artists, etc. This informa- News This function searches the entire wavelength tion can be shown on the display. This function allows news broadcasts sent for the selected programme type. ± Activate/deactivate in FM mode under within a set station's RDS network to break 1. Select a PTY under FM settings PTY Radio text . through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the Select PTY . function is active. Automatic frequency update – AF ± Activate/deactivate under FM settings 2. Go to FM settings PTY Search This function selects one of the strongest News . PTY . transmitters for a set station. The function may need to search through the entire FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If this

142 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 143 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek Press • Local – interrupts only if the radio station Radio system - DAB * Exit to cancel appears on the display. transmitter is close. General • Distant 4 – interrupts if the station trans- ± Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital settings Advanced radio settings mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of static. broadcasting system for radio. AF . • Off – no interruption for programmes from Service and Ensemble Regional radio programmes – REG other transmitters. • Service - Channel, radio channel (only This function causes the radio to continue with audio services are supported by the sys- a regional transmitter even if its signal strength Resetting RDS functions tem). is low. The symbol REG shows that the func- All radio settings can be reset to the original • Ensemble - A collection of radio channels tion is active. factory settings. on the same frequency. 04 ± The reset is carried out in FM mode under ± Activate/deactivate in FM mode under FM Programming of channel groups FM settings Advanced radio settings settings Advanced radio settings (Ensemble learn) Reset all Regional . . When the vehicle is moved to a new broadcasting area, programming of existing channel Enhanced Other Networks – EON Volume control, programme types groups in the area can take place. This function is useful in urban areas with many The interrupting programme types, e.g. NEWS regional radio stations. It allows the distance or TP, are heard at the volume selected for Programming of channel groups creates an between the car and the radio station trans- each respective programme type. If the volume updated list of all available channel groups. mitter to determine when programme functions level is adjusted during the programme inter- The list is not updated automatically. Program- should interrupt the current audio source. ruption, the new level is saved until the next ming takes place via the Ensemble learn programme interruption. menu or directly by means of a long press on Activate/deactivate in FM mode by select- ± AUTO . If can take up to a minute to program a ing one of the options under FM settings channel group if both Band III and LBand are Advanced radio settings EON : selected. Wavelength DAB is transmitted on two wavelengths: Band III and LBand .

4 Default/factory settings. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 144 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

• Band III - over the whole country Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY categories. After selecting a programme type, • LBand - mainly in large cities mode. In which case only the preset type of navigation only takes place within the channels channels is played. broadcasting that type. By selecting for example Band III on its own, channel programming takes place more ± Stop scanning by pressing SCAN once, or Exit this mode as follows: by pressing EXIT . quickly than if both Band III and LBand are ± Press EXIT selected. It is not certain that all channel Subchannel groups will be found. Wavelength selection It is also possible to select a preset channel or does not affect the stored memories. Secondary components are usually named exit DAB-PTY via the menu. In certain cases subchannels. These are temporary and can DAB radio will exit PTY mode when DAB to Navigation via lists contain e.g. translations of the main pro- DAB linking (see below) is implemented. 04 There are three types of basic list which can be gramme into other languages. DAB to DAB link used for navigation: If one or more subchannels are broadcast then It is possible to exit a channel with poor or no the > symbol is shown to the right of the chan- • Ensemble list - Shows channel groups reception to the same channel in another channel name in the display. A subchannel is shown that the receiver has obtained via channel nel group with better reception. There may be > group programming. by means of the symbol appearing to the left a certain delay when changing channel group. • Service list - Shows channels irrespective of the channel name in the display. There may be a short silence between the of the channel group to which they are allo- To access a subchannel: availability of the current channel finishing to cated. The list can also be filtered using the availability of the new channel starting. DAB-PTY (see below). ± Press • Subchannel list - Subchannels to a To navigate between subchannels: DAB display settings selected channel. 1. Basic - Only the channel name is shown if ± Press or a primary component is being played. A The lists can be accessed via the menu. The subchannel name is shown if it is a subchannel groups can also be accessed by Subchannels can only be accessed on the channel being played pressing ENTER . selected main channel and not on any other one without selecting it. 2. Ensemble mode - Adds the channel Scanning (SCAN) group name to the channel name Scanning means that all channels in the list are DAB PTY (program type) 3. Ensemble + PTY - Adds the programme played for 10 seconds each. DAB PTY selects one type of radio programme. There are 29 different programme type name under the channel name ± Press SCAN to activate types which also include different programme

144 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 145 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

Presets 4. DAB PTY 4.22.Phone in A preset contains one channel but no sub- 4.1.DAB PTY off 4.23.Travel & touring channel. If a subchannel is being played and a preset is saved then only the channel ID is reg- 4.2.News 4.24.Leisure & hobby istered. This is because subchannels are tem- 4.3.Current affairs 4.25.Jazz and blues porary. At the next attempt to retrieve the preset, the channel which contained the sub- 4.4.Information 4.26.Country music channel will be played. The preset is not 4.5.Sport 4.27.National music dependent on the channel list. 4.6.Education 4.28.Oldies music A channel stored as a preset does not need to 4.7.Drama 4.29.Folk music be in the channel list to be loaded. If it is loaded 04 without the channel being available then a pre- 4.8.Art 4.30.Documentary set number is shown and there is silence until 4.9.Science 5. Ensemble learn an available preset is selected for loading. Alternatively another channel. 4.10.Conversation 6. DAB settings 4.11.Pop music 6.1.DAB display settings NOTE 4.12Rock music 6.1.1.Ensemble name The audio system's DAB system does not support all functions available in the DAB 4.13.Calm music 6.1.2.Ensemble name and PTY standard. 4.14.Light classic 6.1.3.Basic 4.15.Serious classic 6.2.DAB to DAB link Menu structure 4.16.Other music Main menu DAB 6.3.FM traffic 4.17.Weather & metro 1. Select Ensemble 6.4.Select DAB band 4.18.Finance 2. Select channel (Service) 6.4.1.Band III 4.19Children 3. Select Subchannel 6.4.2.LBand 4.20.Factual 6.4.3.LBand & Band III 4.21.Religion

145 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 146 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Audio system

6.5.Reset DAB

146 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 147 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen *

General TV overview System settings TV The RSE system can be used at the same time Press and select TV I DVD I AUX as the car's infotainment system. Audio mode TV MEDIA MENU . When the rear seat passengers are using DVD, Factory default RSE-AUX or watching TV 1 while listening with Time zone setting headphones, the driver and front seat passen- Channel list ger can still use the car's radio or CD player. CI module No CAM inserted CI module infor- Power consumption, ignition positions mation The system can be activated in ignition position Channel manage- I or II and while the engine is running. When the ment Signal strength 04 car is being started the film stops temporarily and continues when the engine has started.

When the system has been used once without Channel search Management of the ignition in position I it is blocked. To restart, new carriers System settings TV ignition position I must be activated. Press MEDIA MENU System settings Add carrier TV . NOTE Information on fre- In the event of extended use (more than 10 quency Languages E.g. English minutes) with the engine switched off - the Delete a frequency capacity of the car's battery may decrease TV menu language to such a low level that the engine cannot Delete all frequen- be started. cies Pict. format 16:9 In which case a message will appear on the Auto scan 4:3 screen. Auto

1 TV is an option for the RSE system. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 148 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen *

Mode (screen Standard Audio Volume - 1 , e.g. mode) ENG. Zoom Volume - 2 , e.g. Full screen GER. Centered Audio mode Right Audio mode Right Left Left Stereo 0 1 5

Banner timeout 1

AC3 3 0 04 G The menus can be displayed for System settings-Factory settings The box is located under the hatch in the cargo between Press MEDIA MENU System settings area 8-40 seconds. Factory default . 1. Open the hatch in the cargo area, the box The system's factory settings are restored System settings-Sound mode is protected by a cover. here. Press MEDIA MENU System settings 2. Open the rubber cover on the box. Audio mode . System settings-Time zone settings 3. Fit the payment card into the adapter. The original speech for a TV programme can Press MEDIA MENU System settings Make sure that it is fitted correctly. be replaced with speech in another language if Time zone setting . 4. Insert the adapter in the digital TV box. the programme is broadcast with several audio For local programme times to be displayed Make sure that it is inserted correctly. tracks. correctly the time zone must be set. The > The system will detect that it has GUIDE and INFO button menus and the clock received new information. are affected by local time zones. 5. Search to find the new channels that have Pay channels become available, see the section "Pay- To watch pay channels a payment card must ment card TV channels" below. be fitted in an adapter which is inserted into the digital TV box.

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 149 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen *

Payment card TV channels > The sound is directed to the head- 3. Confirm with . Search so that the system identifies the pay- phones. Change CD track ment card's channels. 3. Adjust the audio volume in the headphones ± 1. Press MEDIA MENU on the remote con- using the volume control/wheel on the Change CD track with or trol. headphones. fast-wind by holding the buttons 2. Select Channel search Auto scan . Alternatively - activate the car's audio sys- depressed. A B Pause 3. tem in MODE-AUX and press on Select country and press . 1. the remote control to listen via the speak- Pause and restart the disc with . ers. Formats supported by the digital TV box 2. 04 The TV system supports MPEG-2 transmis- Selecting within a disc directory Stop the disc with . sions. There is the option to receive 1. Load the disc. 3. MPEG-4 transmissions if you buy an adapter. Press again to eject the disc. 2. This adapter is inserted into the digital TV box Press . Discs copied privately can be used. and is fitted in the same way as the adapter for 3. Scroll using the navigation buttons to However, playback and quality depend on the the payment card. See the section "Pay chan- select a file. quality of the source file, format and disc qual- nels" above. ity. 4. Press to select the subdirectory. Music Different playback options AUX input, Electrical socket 12 V Playing back a CD disc The disc can be played back in different ways, The input allows you to connect other equip- 1. Insert the CD with the label side turned scroll with the navigation buttons to select ment. Always follow the instructions included from the buttons. playback option. with the external equipment, or from the manufacturer or reseller, when connecting. Equip- > The disc starts to play back automati- When the dialogue box appears: ment connected via the RSE AUX input can use cally. 1. Press the right-hand navigation button to the screens, wireless headphones, head- 2. Switch on the wireless headphones, select move over in the right-hand menu. phones sockets and the car's speakers. CH A for left-hand screen or CH B for right- 2. Scroll using the navigation buttons to hand screen. select playback options.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 149 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 150 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen *

Connecting the RSE AUX input System Changing the battery in the remote Formats supported by the system. control and wireless headphones The remote control and headphones are pow- Audio CD-DA, DVD Audio Playback, ered by 2 AAA batteries. format MP3, WMA Take along extra batteries for a long journey. Video DVD video, VCD, SVCD, DivX/ format MPEG-4, WMA video, Photo CD Kodak, Photo CD JPG

Disc DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RW, format DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, CD-R, 2 8

04 3 0 3

0 CD-ROM, CD-RW, CD-3, HDCD G

The RSE-AUX input is located under the front arm- Advanced system settings rest. These settings can only be accessed when the

1. Connect the video cable to the yellow 1

DVD player is empty. 6 3 1 3 socket. 0 ± Press MEDIA MENU . G 2. Connect the left-hand audio cable to the white socket and the right-hand one to the GENERAL SETUP ANGLE MARK 1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery red socket. cover. CAPTION 3. Connect the power cable to the power 2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new socket if your equipment is designed for AUDIO SETUP COMPRESSION batteries in accordance with the symbols 12 V. in the battery compartment and insert DVX(R) them. For electrical socket location, see page 187. REGISTRATION 3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw. PREFERENCES TV TYPE AUDIO SUBTITLE DEFAULTS

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 151 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

RSE - Rear Seat Entertainment system - Dual Screen * 8 5 3 1 3 0 G 04

1. Unscrew the screw and detach the battery cover. 2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new batteries in accordance with the symbols in the battery compartment and insert them. 3. Fit the cover and screw in the screw.

NOTE If the system is too hot to be used or if battery voltage is too low then an information message appears on the screen.

Environmental care Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries in an environmentally responsible manner.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 152 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

General Functions Average The average fuel consumption since the last NOTE reset. Reset using RESET . If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, this message must NOTE be acknowledged in order to revert to the There may be a slight error in the reading if trip computer function. Acknowledge by a fuel-driven additional 1, and/or parking pressing READ . heater* has been used.

To change unit specified for distance and Km to empty tank

4 speed, contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

04 6 3

1 The calculation is based on the average fuel 2 0 G Current speed * consumption over the last 30 km and the Information display and controls. The instrument panel display shows current remaining driveable fuel quantity. The display shows the approximate distance that can be READ - confirms speed in mph if the speedometer is graduated in km/h. If the speedometer is graduated in driven with the fuel quantity remaining in the Thumbwheel – browse between menus mph then the current speed is shown in km/h. tank. No guaranteed range remains when the and options in the trip computer list display shows " --- km to empty tank ". Refuel Average speed as soon as possible. RESET – resets The car calculates the average speed from the To scroll through trip computer information, last resetting. Reset using RESET . NOTE turn the thumbwheel up or down in steps. Con- There may be a slight error in the reading if tinue turning to return to the starting point. Instantaneous Current fuel consumption is calculated every a fuel-driven parking heater * has been used or if driving style has been changed. second. The information on the display is updated every couple of seconds. When the car is stationary, " ---- " appears on the display. Resetting 1. Select Average speed or Average . 2. Press and hold RESET for approx. 1 second to reset the selected

1 Diesel cars only.

152 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 153 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Trip computer

function. If RESET is kept depressed for at least 3 three seconds then Average speed and Average are reset simultaneously.

153 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 154 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Compass *

Operation Calibration Selecting the zone The compass may need calibrating to work correctly. C is shown in the mirror's display if the compass needs calibrating. 1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines. 2. Start the car.

NOTE 5 7 9 3

04 2 7 0 9 3 2 0 0 G

G For optimum calibration - switch off all electrical equipment (climate control system, Rearview mirror with compass. wipers etc.) and make sure that all doors are Magnetic zones. closed. The bottom centre of the rearview mirror has The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. an integrated display that shows the compass The correct zone must be selected for the com- direction in which the front of the car is point- 3. Press and hold the button on the rear of the pass to work correctly. rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar) ing. Eight different directions are shown with 1. The remote control key should be in posi- English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north until C is shown again (approx. 6 seconds). tion II , see page 71. east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW 4. Drive off as usual. C disappears from the (south west), W (west) and NW (north west). 2. Press and hold the button on the rear of the display when calibration is complete. rearview mirror (use a paper clip or similar) The compass is activated automatically when Alternative calibration method: Drive for at least 3 seconds. The number for the the car is started or in key position II , see slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than current area is shown. page 71 . To deactivate/activate the compass - 8 km/h until C disappears from the display 3. Press the button repeatedly until the num- press in the button on the rear side of the mirror when calibration is complete. using a paper clip for example. ber for the required geographic area ( 1– 15 ) is shown. 4. The display will revert to showing the compass direction after a few seconds.

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 155 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

DSTC – Stability and traction control system

General information on DSTC engine is restarted, drive to an authorised Operation The stability and traction control system, DSTC Volvo workshop. (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps Symbols in the combined instrument the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction. panel If the symbols and are displayed The system limits the driving and brake force at the same time, read the message on the of the wheels individually so that skidding can information display. be avoided. This increases manoeuvrability and as a result safety in the event of sudden If the symbol appears alone then it may movement. appear as follows: 9

0 04 4 1

Traction is improved by means of the system 2 Flashing light means that the system is 0

• G distributing the driving force between the now being activated. wheels. The system primarily engages at low Constant glow for 2 seconds means sys- speed on poor road surfaces. • 1. Turn the thumbwheel until the DSTC tem check when the engine is started. menu is shown. DSTC ON means that the The activation of the system during braking • Constant glow after starting the engine or system function is unchanged. may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The car while driving means system fault. may accelerate slower than expected when the DSTC spin control OFF means that sys- accelerator pedal is depressed. Reduced operation tem operation is reduced. System operation during skidding and accel- 2. Press and hold RESET until the DSTC Messages in the information display eration can be reduced. Operation during skid- menu is changed. DSTC Temporarily OFF ding is delayed and so allows more skidding System temporarily reduced due to excessive which provides greater freedom for dynamic The system remains reduced until the engine is brake disc temperature. The function is reacti- driving. Traction in deep snow or sand is next started. vated automatically when the brakes have improved as traction is no longer limited. cooled. WARNING DSTC Service required The car's driving characteristics may dete- System disabled due to a fault. riorate if the function is reduced. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine. If the message remains when the

155 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 156 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adapting driving characteristics

Active chassis (Four C) * Operation Active chassis, Four-C (Continuously Con- trolled Chassis Concept), regulates the characteristics of the shock absorbers so that the car's driving characteristics can be adjusted. There are three settings: Comfort, Sport and Advanced. Comfort This setting means that the car is perceived as being more comfortable and is recommended 0 1

04 4 1

for longer journeys. Shock absorption is soft 2 0 and the movement of the body is smooth and G gentle. Chassis settings. Sport Use the buttons in the centre console to This setting means that the car is perceived as change setting. The setting in use when the being more sporty and is recommended for engine is switched off is activated next time the more active driving. Steering response is faster engine is started. than in the Comfort mode. Shock absorption is harder and the body follows the road in order Speed related steering force * to reduce rolling during fast cornering. Steering force increases with the speed of the Advanced car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. At This setting is only recommended on very even low speed the car is easy to steer in order to and smooth road surfaces. facilitate parking for example. The shock absorbers are optimised for maxi- Steering force can be changed under Car mum roadholding and rolling in bends is further settings Steering force level For a minimised. description of the menu system, see page 118 This menu cannot be accessed while the car is in motion.

156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 157 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Cruise control *

Operation Cruise control is then activated with or Temporary deactivation after which the current speed is stored and is Press On to disengage cruise control tem- used as the set speed. The display text (---) porarily. The saved speed is shown in brackets km/h changes to show the set speed, e.g. in the display, e.g. (100) km/h . 100 km/h. , Automatic temporary deactivation NOTE Cruise control is deactivated spontaneously when the driving wheels spin or if the car's Cruise control cannot be engaged at speed falls below approx. ca 30 km/h. Cruise speeds below 30 km/h. control is also deactivated when the brakes are used, when the gear selector is moved to neu- 1

1 04 4 1

2 Adjusting the set speed tral position or if the accelerator pedal is 0 G In active mode the speed is adjusted with long depressed for a longer time (approx. 60 sec- Display and controls. or short presses on or . onds). Cruise control then changes over to standby mode and the set speed is saved. Standby mode A temporary increase in speed using the accel- Resume set speed erator, such as while overtaking, does not Resume set speed affect the cruise control setting. When the If cruise control has been deactivated tempo- Deactivating accelerator is released the car will return to the rarily, it can be reactivated by pressing . The set speed. Activate/set speed speed is then set to the previously set speed. Set speed (in brackets = standby mode) NOTE NOTE If one of the cruise control buttons is kept Activating and setting the speed A significant increase in speed may arise depressed for more than approx. one after the speed has been resumed with . In order to enable the activation of cruise con- minute then cruise control is disengaged. trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode The engine must then be switched off in with the CRUISE button . The symbol order to then reset cruise control. illuminates in the display and the text (---) km/ h shows that cruise control is in standby Deactivation mode. Cruise control is disengaged with CRUISE or by switching off the engine. The set speed is cleared.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 158 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control *

General Function WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control – (ACC) is designed to Adaptive cruise control is not a collision assist the driver with support on long straight avoidance system. The driver must inter- roads in steady traffic, for example on motor- vene if the system does not detect a vehicle ways and main roads. in front. Adaptive cruise control does not brake for WARNING people or animals. Nor for oncoming, slow You must always pay attention to the traffic or stationary vehicles and objects. conditions and intervene when adaptive Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for cruise control is not maintaining a suitable example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at

speed or suitable distance. 2 junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of 04 1 4 1 2 0 water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/ Adaptive cruise control cannot cover all G driving situations and traffic, weather and snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or road conditions. Functions overview. on slip roads. The Function section and after informs Warning lamp, braking by driver required The distance to the vehicle ahead is measured about limitations that the driver must be Controls aware of before using the adaptive cruise by a radar sensor. The speed is regulated by control. Radar sensor acceleration and braking. It is normal for the When driving you are responsible for main- brakes to emit a low sound when they are being Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise taining the correct distance and speed, used by cruise control. even when adaptive cruise control is used. control system and a coordinated spacing system. WARNING IMPORTANT The brake pedal moves when the cruise control brakes. Do not rest your foot under Maintenance of adaptive cruise control the brake pedal as it could become trapped. components must only be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. The cruise control objective is to follow the vehicle ahead but in the same lane and at a set time interval. If the radar sensor has not detected a vehicle ahead then the only objec-

158 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 159 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control * tive is the set speed. This is also the case if the NOTE Set time interval speed of the vehicle ahead exceeds the cruise control set speed. The warning lamp may be difficult to notice Activating and setting the speed in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are The adaptive cruise control aims to control the being worn. Set speed (in brackets = standby mode) speed in a smooth way. In situations that Set time interval during adjustment demand sudden braking you must brake yourself. This applies with large differences in WARNING Set time interval after adjustment speed, or if the vehicle in front brakes heavily. Cruise control only warns of vehicles Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking detected by the radar sensor. Consequently Activating and setting the speed may come unexpectedly or not at all, see there may be no warning or it may be sub- In order to enable the activation of cruise con- ject to a delay. Do not wait for a warning but page 161. trol, it must first be engaged in standby mode 04 brake when it is necessary. Adaptive cruise control can only be activated with the button . The symbol illuminates above 30 km/h. If speed falls below 30 km/h or in the display and the characters (---) show if engine speed becomes too slow, then the Operation that cruise control is in standby mode. adaptive cruise control disengages and stops Cruise control is then activated with or , braking. In which case the driver must imme- after which the current speed is stored and is diately take over and maintain the distance to used as the set speed. The display characters vehicles in front. The highest speed setting is (---) change to show the set speed, e.g. 100 . 200 km/h. The car symbol is illuminated Warning lamp, braking by driver required on the left-hand side of the Adaptive cruise control has a braking capacity display when the radar sensor that is equivalent to approximately 30% of the has detected another vehicle. car's braking capacity. The distance to vehicles in 0 5

3 front is only regulated when

If the car needs to brake more heavily than 7 1 0 cruise control capacity and the driver does not G the symbol is illuminated. brake, then the cruise control uses the collision Display and controls. warning system's warning lamp and warning Activate and resume settings, increase NOTE sound to alert the driver that immediate inter- speed Cruise control cannot be engaged at vention is required. Standby mode, on/off speeds below 30 km/h.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 160 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control *

Adjusting the set speed At low speed, when the distances are short, the Deactivating and resuming settings In active mode the speed is adjusted with long adaptive cruise control increases the time Cruise control is deactivated, either with a or short presses on , or . In active interval slightly. short press on , or by means of driver inter- mode the button has the same function as The adaptive cruise control allows the time vention, e.g. braking. The set speed is then but results in a lower increase in speed. interval to vary noticeably in certain situations shown in brackets, e.g. ( 100) . Speed and time in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in interval are resumed with one press on . front smoothly and comfortably. NOTE For each additional press on , when cruise If one of the cruise control buttons is kept Note that a short time interval only allows the control is activated, the set speed increases in depressed for more than approx. one driver a short reaction time if any unforeseen stages of 1 km/h. minute then cruise control is disengaged. traffic problem should arise. 04 The engine must then be switched off in The number of lines for the NOTE order to then reset cruise control. selected time interval is A significant increase in speed may arise In some situations cruise control cannot be shown during the setting itself after the speed has been resumed with . activated. In which case Cruise control and for several seconds after- Unavailable is shown in the display, see wards. Then a smaller scale page 162. version of the symbol is A short press on in standby mode or a long shown to the right of the dis- press in active mode deactivates cruise con- Set time interval play. The same symbol is also shown when trol. The set speed is cleared and cannot be The set time interval to vehicles in front is Distance Alert is activated, see page 164. resumed. increased with and decreased with . NOTE Deactivation due to driver intervention Five different time intervals Cruise control is deactivated when the brakes can be chosen from and Only use the time interval that is allowed in are used, the gear selector is moved to neutral shown in the display as 1–5 accordance with local traffic regulations. position, or if the accelerator pedal is horizontal lines – the more If cruise control does not seem to react to depressed for a longer period. Cruise control lines there are the longer the activation the reason may be that the time then changes over to standby mode and the time interval, see page 164 interval to the closest vehicle prevents an driver must regulate vehicle speed manually. for table. increase in speed. If the accelerator pedal is kept depressed for a The higher the speed, the longer the calculated distance in metres for a specific time shorter period, for example during overtaking, interval. cruise control is temporarily disengaged and

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 161 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control * then re-engaged when the accelerator pedal is Modification of the radar sensor could result in released. it being illegal to use.

Automatic deactivation WARNING Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems e.g. stability and traction control sys- Accessories or other objects such as auxil- tem (DSTC). If any of these systems stop work- iary lamps must not be installed in front of ing then cruise control is automatically deacti- the grille. vated. The capacity of the radar sensor to detect vehi- In the event of automatic deactivation a signal cles in front is reduced significantly: will sound and the message Cruise control 04 Cancelled is shown in the display. The driver • if the radar sensor becomes blocked and must then intervene and adapt the speed to cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy vehicles in front. rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sensor. An automatic deactivation can be due to: • speed falls below 30 km/h NOTE • wheels lose traction Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor 4 1

clean. 4 brake temperature is high 1 • 2 0 • engine speed is too low G if the speed of vehicles in front is signifi- the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet • Radar sensor field of vision (grey). • cantly different from your own speed. snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked). Sometimes the radar sensor cannot detect The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In vehicles at close quarters, for example a some situations it may detect another vehicle The radar sensor and its limitations vehicle that drives in between your car and later than expected or not detect any vehicle at vehicles in front. Apart from the adaptive cruise control, the all. radar sensor is also used by the Collision Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or Warning with Auto Brake function (see vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane page 167 ) and the Distance Alert function ( see can remain undetected. page 164). It is designed to detect cars or larger vehicles driving in the same direction.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 162 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control *

In bends the radar sensor may detect the radar signals from the radar sensor are blocked with Auto Brake functions are not operating wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle and that vehicles in front of the car could not either. from view. be detected. The table presents possible causes for a mes- Fault tracing and action In turn this means that the Adaptive Cruise sage being shown along with the appropriate If the display shows the message Radar Control, Distance Alert and Collision Warning action. blocked See manual this means that the

Cause Action

04 The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow. Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals. No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.

Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar sig- No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy nals. road surface.

The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains. Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer blocked.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Standby mode or active mode without detected vehicle.

Active mode with detected vehicle to which cruise control adapts the speed.

Set time interval, during adjustment.

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 163 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Adaptive cruise control *

Symbol Message Specification Set time interval, after adjustment.

Turn on DSTC to enable Cruise control cannot be activated until the traction control and stability function (DSTC) has been Cruise activated.

Cruise control Cancelled The cruise control has been shut down. The driver must regulate the speed.

Cruise control Unavailable Cruise control cannot be activated. 04 This could be due to: • brake temperature is high • the radar sensor is blocked e.g. by wet snow or rain. Radar blocked See manual Cruise control temporarily disengaged. The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush has collected in front of the radar sensor. Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 161.

Cruise control Service Cruise control not working. required Contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 164 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

General WARNING Five different time intervals Distance Alert is a function that indicates the can be chosen from and Distance Alert only shows the distance to time interval to vehicles in front. shown in the display as 1–5 vehicles in front – the speed of the car is not horizontal lines – the more affected. The distance information is only provided for lines there are the longer the vehicles driving in front of the car and in the time interval. same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehi- Operation cles. Number of lines Time interval (seconds) 1 1.0 04 2 1.4

3 1.8

4 2.2 2 6 3 7 1 0 1

G 5 2.6 7 3 7 1 0 G A small section of the red warning lamp in the The number of lines for the windscreen illuminates with a constant glow Press the button in the centre console to switch selected time interval is when driving closer than the set time interval to the function on or off. The function is switched shown during the setting itself vehicles in front. on if one lamp is illuminated in the button. and for several seconds after- wards. Then a smaller scale NOTE Set time interval version of the symbol is The buttons for setting the time interval to vehi- Distance Alert is deactivated during the time shown to the right of the dis- that Adaptive Cruise Control is active. cles in front are located to the left in the steer- play. The same symbol is also shown when ing wheel. Time intervals are increased using adaptive cruise control is activated. and decreased using . Distance Alert is active at speeds above 30 km/h.

164 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 165 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

NOTE Limitations NOTE The function uses the same radar sensor as The higher the speed, the longer the calcu- Strong sunlight, reflections or strong varia- lated distance in metres for a specific time adaptive cruise control and the collision warn- tions in light intensity, as well as wearing interval. ing system. For more information on the radar sunglasses, could mean that the warning sensor and its limitations, see page 161. light in the windscreen cannot be seen. The set time interval is also used by the adaptive cruise control function, see page 159. Poor weather or winding roads could affect the Only use the time interval that is allowed in radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles in accordance with local traffic regulations. front. The size of other vehicles could also affect detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This could mean that the warning lamp illumi- 04 nates at a shorter distance than the setting or that the warning is temporarily absent. In which case, select a shorter time interval or switch off the function temporarily.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Set time interval, during adjustment.

Set time interval, after adjustment.

165 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 166 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Distance Alert

Symbol Message Specification Radar blocked. See man- Distance Alert temporarily disengaged. ual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush has collected in front of the radar sensor. Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 161 . Collision warn. Service Distance Alert or Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged. required Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains. 04

166 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 167 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake *

General WARNING Function Collision Warning with Auto Brake is designed The collision warning system does not work to assist the driver when there is a risk of col- in all driving situations and traffic, weather liding with a vehicle in front that is stationary or and road conditions. The collision warning driving in the same direction. system does not react to vehicles driving in another direction to the car or to people and The collision warning system has the following animals. three functions. Warning only activated in the event of a high 1. Collision warning risk for collision. The Function section and Warns the driver of a potentially imminent col- the section after advise about limitations of which the driver should be aware before lision. 2 04 8

using Collision Warning with Auto Brake. 3 7 1 0 2. Brake support The Auto Brake function can only reduce the G Assists the driver to brake effectively in a criti- collision speed. The driver must depress the Functions overview. brake pedal to achieve full brake function. cal situation. Visual warning signal in the event of a col- Never wait for a collision warning. When lision risk 3. Auto Brake driving you are responsible for maintaining Brakes the car automatically when a collision the correct distance and speed, even when Radar sensor is unavoidable. The Auto Brake function can- the collision warning system is used. Camera sensor not prevent a collision but instead aims to reduce collision speed. Collision warning Together with a camera sensor, the radar sen- IMPORTANT sor detects stationary vehicles as well as vehi- Maintenance of collision warning system cles driving in the same direction in front of the components must only be performed by an car. In the event of there being a risk of collision authorised Volvo workshop. with such a vehicle your attention is drawn with a red flashing warning lamp and a warning sound. The collision warning system is active from and including 7 km/h.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 168 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake *

Brake support On and Off uations, then change to warning distance If the risk of collision still increases after the To select whether the collision warning system Normal . collision warning then the brake support is acti- should be switched on or off: Under the Car Only use warning distance Short in excep- vated. The brake support prepares the brake settings Collision warning settings menu, tional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving. system for rapid braking and the brakes are select between the options for On or Off. The applied gently, which may be noticed as a setting selected when the engine was switched NOTE slight jerk. off is automatically obtained when the engine When the adaptive cruise control is in use If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently is started. the warning lamp and warning sound will be quickly then full brake function is implemented, Activating/deactivating warning signals used by the cruise control even if the colli- even with light pedal force. The warning sound and warning lamp are acti- sion warning system is switched off. 04 Auto Brake vated automatically when the engine is started The collision warning system warns the If the driver has not yet started an evasive if the system is switched on. driver in the event of a risk of a collision, but the function cannot shorten driver reaction manoeuvre in this situation and the risk of a The warning sound can be activated/deacti- time. collision is imminent then the Auto Brake func- vated separately using the options for On or In order for the collision warning system to tion comes into effect, without the driver need- Off under Car settings Collision warning ing to touch the brake pedal. Braking then be effective, always drive with the Distance settings Warning sound . Alert set at time interval 4 – 5. see takes place with limited brake force in order to page 164. reduce collision speed. The driver has to brake Set warning distance in order to achieve full brake force. The warning distance regulates the distance at which the visual and acoustic warnings are NOTE Operation deployed. Select one of the options from Even if the warning distance has been set to Settings are made from the centre console dis- Long , Normal or Short under Car settings Long then in certain situations warnings play via a menu system. For information on Collision warning settings Warning could be perceived as being late. E.g. in the event of large differences in speed or if vehi- how the menu system is used, see page 118. distance . cles in front brake heavily. The warning distance determines the system's NOTE sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an Checking settings The Auto Brake function is always switched earlier warning. First test with Long and if this The settings required can be controlled on the on and cannot be switched off. setting produces too many warnings, which centre console display. Access via the menu could be perceived as irritating in certain sit-

168 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 169 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake * for Car settings Collision warning WARNING Driver Alert Control, see page 172 and Lane settings , see page 118. Departure Warning, see page 175. Warnings and braking action could be implemented late or not at all if the traffic Limitations situation or external influences mean that NOTE the radar or camera sensor cannot detect a The visual warning signal may be difficult to Keep the windscreen surface in front of the vehicle in front correctly. notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflec- camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist and dirt. tions, when sunglasses are being worn or if the The sensor system has a limited range for driver is not looking straight ahead. The warn- stationary or slow vehicles so the system Do not attach or fit anything to the wind- provides less effective warnings or no warning sound should therefore always be acti- screen in front of the camera sensor, as this ings at all at a higher vehicle speed (above could reduce or prevent the function of one vated. 70 km/h) for such vehicles. or more camera-dependent systems. 04 Warnings for stationary or slow vehicles NOTE could be disengaged due to darkness. The camera sensors have limitations similar to The visual warning signal can be temporarily the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in dark- disengaged in the event of high passenger The collision warning system uses the same ness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick fog for compartment temperature caused by strong sunlight for example. If this occurs radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For example. Under such conditions the functions then the warning sound is activated even if more information on the radar sensor and its of camera-dependent systems could be sig- it is deactivated in the menu system. limitations, see page 161. nificantly reduced or temporarily disengaged. • Warnings may not appear if the dis- An absent or late warning could mean that Strong oncoming light, reflections in the car- tance to the vehicle in front is small or if there is no brake support or it comes late. riageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty steering wheel and pedal movements road surfaces or unclear lane markings could If warnings are perceived as being too frequent are large, e.g. a very active driving style. also significantly reduce a camera sensor func- or disturbing then the warning distance can be tion. Functions such as scanning the carriage- reduced. This would lead to the system warn- way and detecting other vehicles for example. ing at a later stage, which reduces the total number of warnings. During very high temperatures the camera is temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes Camera sensor limitations after the engine is started in order to protect The car's camera sensor is used by the three camera functionality. functions - Collision Warning with Auto Brake,

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 169 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 170 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake *

Fault tracing and action Cause Action Cause Action If the display shows the message Windscreen Sensors blocked then this means that the The windscreen sur- Clean the wind- The windscreen sur- Wait. It may take camera sensor is blocked and cannot detect face in front of the screen surface in face in front of the several minutes for vehicles or road markings in front of the car. camera is dirty or front of the camera camera has been the camera to meas- covered with ice or from dirt, ice and cleaned but the ure the visibility. In turn this means that the Collision Warning snow. snow. message remains. with Auto Brake, Lane Departure Warning and Driver Alert Control functions are not operating Thick fog, heavy rain No action. At times Dirt has appeared Contact an author- with full functionality. or snow means that the camera does not between the inside ised Volvo work- The table presents possible causes for a mes- the camera does not work during heavy of the windscreen shop to have the 04 sage being shown along with the appropriate work sufficiently rain or snowfall. and the camera. windscreen inside action. well. the camera cover cleaned.

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Collis'n warning OFF Collision warning system switched off. Shown when the engine is started. The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.

Collision warn. Unavailable The collision warning system cannot be activated. Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function. The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the READ button.

Auto braking was acti- Auto Brake has been active. vated

170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 171 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Collision Warning with Auto Brake *

Symbol Message Specification Windscreen Sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. blocked Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example. Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.

Radar blocked. See man- Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged. ual The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event that heavy rain or slush has collected in front of the radar sensor. 04 Read about the limitations of the radar sensor see page 161

Collision warn. Service Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged. required Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 172 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System – DAC *

Introduction General information on Driver Alert The objective for DAC is to detect slowly dete- The Driver Alert System is intended to assist Control - DAC riorating driving ability and it is primarily drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or intended for major roads. The function is not who are inadvertently leaving the lane they are intended for city traffic. driving on. In some cases driving ability is not affected The Driver Alert System consists of two differ- despite driver fatigue. In which case there may ent functions, which can either be switched on not be any warning issued for the driver. For at the same time or individually: this reason it is always important to stop and take a break in the event of any signs of driver • Driver Alert Control (DAC) fatigue, irrespective of whether or not DAC 04 • Lane Departure Warning (LDW), see issues a warning. page 175. 2 3 3 7

A switched-on function is set in standby mode 1 NOTE 0 G and is not activated automatically until speed The function must not be used to extend a exceeds 65 km/h. The function is intended to attract the driver's driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular The function is deactivated again when speed attention when he/she starts to drive less con- intervals and ensure that you are fully decreases to below 60 km/h. sistently, e.g. if he/she becomes distracted or rested. starts to fall asleep. Both functions use a camera which is depend- Limitation ent on the lane having side markings painted A camera detects the side markings painted on on each side. the carriageway and compares the section of In some cases the system may issue a warning the road with the driver's steering wheel move- despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example: WARNING ments. The driver is alerted if the vehicle does not follow the carriageway evenly. • if the driver tests the LDW function. The Driver Alert System does not work in all situations but is instead only intended to be • in strong side winds. NOTE of supplementary assistance. • on rutted road surfaces. The driver always has ultimate responsibility The camera sensor has certain limitations, that the car is driven safely. see page 169.

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 173 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System – DAC *

Operation Thumbwheel. Turn the rotary control until If the vehicle is driven inconsistently then the Some settings are made from the centre con- the display shows Driver Alert . The sec- driver is alerted by an acoustic signal as well as sole display and its menu system. For informa- ond row displays the Off , Unavailable or the text message Driver Alert Time for a tion on how the menu system is used, see Level mark options. break . The warning is repeated after a time if page 118. READ button. Confirms or clears a warning driving ability does not improve. The current status can be checked on the trip in the memory. WARNING computer display with the left-hand stalk Activating Driver Alert Control switch. An alarm should be taken most seriously as Using the centre console display with its menu a sleepy driver is not usually aware of his/ system, locate Car settings Driver Alert . her condition. Select the On option. In the event of an alarm or signs of driver 04 The function is activated when speed fatigue; stop the car in a safe manner as exceeds 65 km/h and it remains soon as possible and rest. active as long as the speed exceeds Studies have shown that it is equally as dan- 60 km/h. The display shows a level gerous to drive when tired as it is under the mark with 1-5 bars, where a low number of bars influence of alcohol. indicates inconsistent driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving. 9 2 3 7 1 0 G

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Driver Alert OFF Function not switched on.

Driver Alert Unavailable Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 174 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System – DAC *

Symbol Message Specification Driver Alert The function analyses the driver's driving style. The number of bars can vary in the range 1-5, where a low number of bars indicates inconsistent driving ability. A high number of bars indicates stable driving.

Driver Alert Time for a The vehicle has been driven inconsistently; the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text. break

Windscreen Sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. 04 blocked Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example. Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is disengaged. required Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains.

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 175 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW *

General information on Lane Departure Operation and function If the camera can no longer detect the carria- Warning - LDW geway's side markings or if speed decreases to below 60 km/h then the function resumes standby mode and the display shows Lane Depart Warn Unavailable . If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand side marking of the carriageway without due cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic signal. No warning is given in the following situations: Direction indicators activated 6 • 04 2 4 7 1 4

0 The driver has his/her foot on the brake

9 • G 3

7 1 1 pedal 0 G The function is switched on or off by means of • In the event of the accelerator pedal being The function is intended to reduce the risk for a switch on the centre console. An indicator depressed rapidly 1 single-vehicle accidents – accidents where, in lamp in the button illuminates when the func- • In the event of rapid steering wheel move- certain situations, the vehicle leaves the car- tion is switched on. ments 1 riageway and is in danger of driving either into The trip computer display shows Lane Depart In the event of a sudden turn so that the car a ditch or into oncoming traffic. • Warn Unavailable when the function is in rolls. LDW consists of a camera that detects the side standby mode. The camera sensor also has certain limitations. markings painted on the carriageway. The The LDW function is activated automatically For more information, see page 169. driver is alerted by an acoustic signal if the from standby mode after the camera has scan- vehicle crosses a side marking. ned in the carriageway's side markings and NOTE speed exceeds 65 km/h. The trip computer The driver is only warned once each time the display then shows Lane Depart Warn wheels cross a line. So there is no acoustic Available . alarm when there is a line between the car's wheels.

1 A warning is still given when Increased sensitivity is selected, see Personal preferences. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 176 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW *

Symbols and messages in the display Symbol Message Specification Lane departure warning The function is switched on/off. On/Off Shown at switch-on/off. The text disappears after 5 seconds.

Lane Depart Warn Availa- The function scans the carriageway's side markings. ble

04 Lane Depart Warn Unavail- Speed is lower than 60 km/h, the carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor able is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.

Windscreen Sensors The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. blocked Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example. Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 169.

Driver Alert Sys Service The system is disengaged. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if the message remains. required

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 177 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Driver Alert System - LDW *

Personal preferences See the centre console display with its menu system and there search for Car settings Lane departure warning . Select the option required, see page 118. On at start up : This option sets the function in standby mode each time the car is started. Otherwise the same value as when the engine was switched off is obtained.

Increased sensitivity : This option increases 04 sensitivity, an alarm is triggered earlier and fewer limitations apply.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 178 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park Assist *

General 1 Function 1 Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols on the Activ e audio system display indicate the distance to the detected obstacle. 2 Parking assistance is available in two variants: • Rear only Active Both front and rear. • 3 3 4 6 5 2 0 G 7

04 WARNING 1 4

1 Active 2 0 Parking assistance does not relinquish the G Display screens in different situations. driver's own responsibility during parking. Display in car with only rear sensors. The sensors have blind spots where obsta- The system is automatically engaged when the Obstacle detected by both right-hand sen- cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil- car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is sors. dren and animals near the car. illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out. Display in car with both front and rear sensors. The front right-hand sensor is 30 cm The centre console display shows an overview or closer to a detected obstacle. of the relationship between the car and detected obstacle. Display in car with both front and rear sensors. Reverse gear engaged, no front or Marked fields show which of the four sensors rear obstacle detected. detected an obstacle. The more marked fields When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is in the same bar, the shorter the distance constant and the marked sensors' bar is fully between the car and detected obstacle. filled in, see figure (2). If the detected obstacle The frequency of the signal increases the is within the distance for the constant tone both shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of behind and in front of the car, then the tone or behind the car. Other sound from the audio sounds alternately from the loudspeakers. system is muted automatically.

1 Depending on the market, the Parking assistance system may be either Standard, Option or Accessory.

178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 179 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park Assist *

Rear parking assistance Front parking assistance IMPORTANT When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember that they must not obscure the sensors – the auxiliary lamps could then be detected as obstacles.

Fault indicator If the information symbol illuminates with constant glow and the informa- 3 4

3 2 tion display shows Park assist syst Service

8 4 04 7 1 1 2 0 0

G G required then parking assistance is disengaged. The distance covered to the rear of the car is The distance covered to the front of the car is about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for IMPORTANT obstacles behind comes from the rear loud- obstacles in front comes from the front loud- In certain conditions the parking assistance speakers. speaker. system may produce incorrect warning sig- Rear parking assistance is activated when Front parking assistance is active at speeds up nals that are caused by external audio sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- reverse gear is engaged. to 15 km/h, and also during reversing. The sys- quencies that the system works with. tem is deactivated at a higher speed. However, The system must be deactivated when revers- the lamp in the button remains illuminated in Examples of such sources include horns, ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar order to indicate that the system is activated wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and or similar. Otherwise they would trigger the exhaust noises from motorcycles etc. for the next time the driver shall park. When the sensors. speed is below 10 km/h the system is reactivated. NOTE Rear parking assistance is deactivated NOTE automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used. Front parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 180 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Park Assist *

Cleaning the sensors NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals. 9

04 2 1 8 1 0 G

Sensor location, front. 7 6 0 8 1 0 G

Sensor location, rear. The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 181 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS * – Blind Spot Information System

General information on BLIS WARNING Blind spots The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.

The system is designed to work most effectively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane

6 highways. 4

2 3 04 4 8 1 7 2 1 0 0 G When a camera has detected a vehicle G inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp BLIS camera A = approx. 9.5 m and B = approx. 3 m illuminates with a constant glow. Indicator lamp Activating/deactivating BLIS symbol NOTE The lamp illuminates on the side of the car BLIS is an information system based on cam- where the system has detected the vehicle. era technology that under certain conditions If the car is overtaken on both sides at the can help the driver to notice vehicles moving in same time then both lamps illuminate. the same direction as the host vehicle in the so- called "blind spot". BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault arises in the system. If for example the sys- IMPORTANT tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS Repair of the BLIS system components indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown 8 2 4 1

must only be performed by an authorised on the information display. In such cases, 2 0 Volvo workshop. check and clean the lenses. G If necessary, the system can be switched off Button for activating/deactivating. temporarily by pressing the BLIS button, see page 181. ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 182 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS * – Blind Spot Information System

BLIS is activated when the engine is started. WARNING WARNING The indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times when BLIS is activated. BLIS does not work in sharp bends. The system does not react to bicycles or mopeds. The system can be deactivated/activated BLIS does not work when the car is reversing. The BLIS cameras can be disrupted by when the engine is started by pressing the intensive light or when driving in the dark A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal BLIS button. when there are no light sources (e.g. street other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- lighting or other vehicles). The system may When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button vent the vehicle in the screened area from then interpret the lack of light as if the cam- goes out and a text message is shown on the being detected by BLIS. eras have been blocked. dashboard display. In both cases a message is shown in the 04 When BLIS is activated the light in the button Daylight and darkness information display. illuminates, a new text message is shown on In daylight the system reacts to the shape of When driving in such conditions system the display and the indicator lamps in the door the surrounding vehicles. The system is performance may be temporarily deterio- panels flash three times. Press the READ but- designed to detect motor vehicles such as rate and a text message is shown, see ton to clear the text message. For more infor- cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles. page 182. If the message disappears auto- mation on messages, see page 121. In darkness the system reacts to the head- matically then BLIS has returned to normal functionality. lamps of surrounding vehicles. If the head- When BLIS operates lamps of surrounding vehicles are not switched The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to The system operates when the car is driven at on then the system does not detect the vehi- the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in heavy snowfall or thick fog for example. a speed above 10 km/h. cles. This means for example that the system does not react to a trailer without headlamps Overtaking which is towed behind a car or truck. Cleaning The system is designed to react if: In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam- • you overtake another vehicle at a speed of era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge. • you are overtaken by a vehicle travelling up Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not to 70 km/h faster than you are travelling. scratched.

182 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 183 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS * – Blind Spot Information System

IMPORTANT Message Specification Here are several examples of situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice Blind spot syst. The BLIS camera is there is no other vehicle within the blind spot. or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses. Reduced function disrupted by fog or strong sunlight shining directly into the Messages on the display camera. Message Specification The camera resets itself when the envi- Blind-spot info BLIS system on ronment has 0 3 4 1 2

system ON returned to normal. 0 04 G

Blind spot syst. BLIS not function- Blind-spot info BLIS system off Reflection from shiny wet road surface. Service required ing. system OFF Contact an authorised Volvo work- Limitations shop. In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may Blind spot syst. The BLIS camera is illuminate despite there being no other vehicle Camera blocked blocked by dirt, within the blind spot. 1

snow or ice. Clean 3 4 1 2 0

the lenses. NOTE G

If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- Own shadow on large light smooth surface, e.g. lated occasions despite there being no noise barrier or concrete road surface. other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system. In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text Blind spot syst. Service required .

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 184 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

BLIS * – Blind Spot Information System 2 3 4 1 2 0 G

Low stationary sunlight shining into the camera. 04

184 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 185 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

Storage spaces

04 7 1 4 9 1 0 G

185 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 186 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

Storage compartment in door panel Tunnel console Glovebox Storage pocket * on front edge of front seat cushions Ticket clip Glovebox Storage compartment, cup holder Jacket holder 6 Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat 5 0 04 8 2 9 4 3 2 2 0 0 G Storage pocket G

Jacket holder Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs) The owner's manual and maps can be kept and AUX input under the armrest (and stor- The jacket holder is only designed for light here for example. There are also holders for age tray*). clothing. pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox can Includes cup holder for driver and passen- be locked with the key blade, see page 43. ger, and 12 V socket and small compartment. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter are Floor mats * specified then the 12 V socket is replaced Volvo supplies specially manufactured floor by a cigarette lighter and the small com- mats. partment by a detachable ashtray.) Cigarette lighter and ashtray * WARNING The ashtray in the tunnel console is emptied by The floor mat at the driver's seat must be lifting it straight up. firmly fitted and secured in the attachment Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.

186 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 187 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Comfort inside the passenger compartment

Vanity mirror 12 V socket the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least position I, see page 71.

WARNING Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

Electrical socket in cargo area * 8 9

3 3 04 4 4 1 1 2 2 0 0 G G

Vanity mirror with lighting. 12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat. The lamp for the vanity mirror, on the driver's side* and passenger side respectively, is switched on automatically when the cover is raised. 5 2 8 7 1 0 G

Fold down the cover to access the electrical socket. It works irrespective of whether or not 0 4 4

1 the ignition is switched on. 2 0 G

12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat. NOTE The electrical socket can be used for 12 V Do not use the electric socket with the accessories, such as mobile phone chargers engine switched off as there is a risk of the and coolers. The maximum current is 10 A. For battery becoming discharged.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 188 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree *

General NOTE tion. Same functionality available in steering wheel keypad. Only a selection of mobile phones is fully compatible with the handsfree function. ENTER – Accept calls. A press of the but- Information on compatible phones is avail- ton reveals latest dialled numbers. Same able at Volvo dealers and at functionality available in steering wheel www.volvocars.com. keypad.

Phone functions, controls overview Remember The menus are controlled from the centre console and the steering wheel keypad. For gen- 3

04 4 4

1 eral information on menus, see page 118. 2 0 G Activating/deactivating System overview. A short press on PHONE activates the hands- Mobile phone free function. The text PHONE at the top of the display shows that it is in phone mode. The Microphone symbol shows that the handsfree func- Steering wheel keypad tion is active. 4 4 4 1 2 Centre console 0 One long press on PHONE deactivates the G handsfree function and disconnects a con- Bluetooth TM Centre console control panel. nected phone. A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth TM VOLUME – Same functionality available in can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys- steering wheel keypad. Connect mobile phone A mobile phone is connected in different ways tem. The audio system then works handsfree, Number and letter buttons with the option to control a range of the mobile depending on whether or not it has been con- phone's functions remotely. The mobile phone PHONE - On/off and standby mode nected previously. To connect a mobile phone can be operated by its own keys irrespective of for the first time, follow the instructions below: Navigation button whether or not it is connected. EXIT - End/refuse phone calls, clear entered characters, interrupt current func-

188 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 189 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree *

Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system To call 1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible 1. Activate the handsfree function with 1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown via Bluetooth TM , see mobile phone manual PHONE . If there is a phone connected, at the top of the display and that the or www.volvocars.com. disconnect the connected phone. symbol is visible. 2. Activate the handsfree function with 2. Search with the phone's Bluetooth TM , see 2. Dial the number or use the phone book, PHONE . the mobile phone manual. see page 191. > Menu option Add phone appears on 3. Select My Car in the list of units detected 3. Press ENTER . the display. If one or more mobile in your mobile phone. The call is interrupted with EXIT . phones have already been registered 4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile then these are also shown. Disconnecting the mobile phone phone when prompted for the PIN code. 04 3. Select Add phone . Automatic disconnection takes place if the 5. Select to connect to My Car from the mobile phone moves out of the audio system's > The audio system searches for mobile mobile phone. range. For more information on connection, phones in the vicinity. The search takes see page 191. approximately 30 seconds. The mobile The mobile phone is registered and connected phones detected are specified with their automatically to the audio system while the text Manual disconnection takes place by deacti- respective Bluetooth TM name in the dis- Synchronising is shown in the display. For vating the handsfree function with one long play. The handsfree function's more information on how mobile phones are press on PHONE . The handsfree function is Bluetooth TM name is shown in the registered, see page 191. also deactivated when the engine is switched 1 mobile phone such as My Car . When the connection is established the symbol off or when a door is opened . 4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the is shown and the mobile phone When the mobile phone has been discon- audio system display. Bluetooth TM name is shown in the display. Now nected an ongoing call can be continued with the mobile phone can be controlled from the the mobile phone's built-in microphone and 5. Enter the number series shown in the audio audio system. speaker. system display via the mobile phone keypad.

1 Only Keyless Drive ``

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 190 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree *

NOTE NOTE The audio source can be automatically muted for incoming calls under Phone settings Some mobile phones require that the With certain mobile phones the connection changeover from handsfree is confirmed is terminated when the privacy function is Sounds and volume Mute radio . from the phone's keypad. used. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect. Ring volume Go to Phone settings Sounds and volume Making and receiving calls • Phone book – searching in the phone Ring volume and adjust with / on the navigation button. Incoming call book. Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the Ring signals audio system is in CD or FM mode for example. NOTE 04 The handsfree function has integrated ring sig- Refuse or end with EXIT . A new call cannot be started during an nals that can be selected under Phone ongoing call. Automatic answer settings Sounds and volume Ring The automatic answer function means that signals Ring signal 1, 2, 3 etc. calls are accepted automatically. Audio settings NOTE ± Activate/deactivate under Phone settings Phone call volume Call options Automatic answer . The call volume can be regulated when the The connected mobile phone's ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree handsfree function is in phone mode. Use the In call menu system's integrated signals is used. steering wheel keypad or VOLUME . Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call to access the following functions: Audio system volume In order to select the connected phone's ring 2 • Mute microphone - audio system micro- Providing there is no ongoing call taking place, signal , go to Phone settings Sounds and phone is muted. the audio system volume is controlled as usual volume Ring signals Use mobile with VOLUME . In order to control audio system Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans- phone signal . • volume during an ongoing call you have to ferred to the mobile phone. switch to one of the audio sources.

2 Not supported by all mobile phones.

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 191 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree *

More on registering and connecting Phone book The phone book can also be reached with / A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg- All use of the phone book presupposes that the on the navigation button or with / on istered. Registration is performed once per text PHONE is shown at the top of the display the steering wheel keypad. The search can also phone. After registration the phone no longer and that the symbol is visible. be performed from the phone book's Search needs to be visible/detectable. A maximum of menu under Phone book Search : one mobile phone can be connected at a time. The audio system stores a copy of the phone Phones can be deregistered under Bluetooth book from each registered mobile phone. The 1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and phone book is copied automatically to the Remove phone . press ENTER , or simply press ENTER . audio system during each connection. 2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to Automatic connection ± Deactivate the function under Phone call. When the handsfree function is active and the settings Synchronise phone book . 04 last mobile phone connected is in range it is Searching for contacts is only performed in Voice recognition connected automatically. When the audio sys- the connected mobile phone's phone The mobile phone's voice recognition function tem searches for the last phone connected its book. for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER . name is shown in the display. To change over Voice mail number to manual connection of another phone, press NOTE EXIT . Voice mail number can be changed under If the mobile phone does not support copy- Phone settings Call options Voice mail Manual connection ing of the phone book then List is empty is number . If there is no number stored then this If you want to connect a mobile phone other shown when copying is finished. menu can be reached with one long press on than the last connected or change the con- 1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored nected mobile phone, proceed as follows: If the phone book contains a ringing caller's number. 1. Set the audio system in phone mode. contact information then this is shown in the display. Call lists 2. Press PHONE and select one of the The call lists are copied to the handsfree func- phones in the list. Searching for contacts tion at each new connection and are then The connection can also be made via the menu The easiest way to search in the phone book is updated during the connection. Press ENTER system under Bluetooth Connect phone with long presses on the keys 2–9 . This starts to show the last dialled. Other call lists are a search in the phone book based on the key's available under Call register . or Change phone . first letter.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 192 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Bluetooth handsfree *

NOTE Key Function Certain mobile phones show a list of the last P Q R S 7 ß dialled calls in reverse order.

T U V 8 Ü Ù Inputting text Input text using the keypad in the centre console. Press once for the key's first character, W X Y Z 9 twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for more characters, see the following table. Pressed briefly if two characters shall be entered after each other 04 A short press on EXIT deletes an input character. One long press on EXIT clears all input with the same key. characters. / on the navigation button + 0 @ * # & $ £ / % scrolls between the characters. Shift between upper and lower Key Function case letter Space . 1 - ? ! , : " ' ( )

A B C 2 Ä Å À Æ Ç

D E F 3 È É

G H I 4 Ì

J K L 5

M N O 6 Ñ Ö Ò Ø

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 193 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone *

General Remember out. The text PHONE shows that the phone menu is active. SIM card The phone can only be used with a valid SIM Switch off the phone with one long press on card ( Subscriber Identity Module). For installa- PHONE . tion, see page 196. Emergency calls to emergency numbers can be made without a SIM Making and receiving calls card. Making calls NOTE 1. Switch on the phone. 2. If PHONE is not shown in the display,

6 The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM

4 04 4 1

2 briefly press PHONE .

0 cards. Combined 3G/GSM cards work. G Contact the network operator if the SIM 3. Dial the number or use the phone book, card needs to be changed. System overview. see page 194. Microphone Menus and controls 4. Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the privacy handset. Release the handset SIM card reader The menus are navigated using the control by pulling it down. Keypad, see page 135 panel and the steering wheel keypad. For general information on menus, see Ending a call Control panel page 118 . For information on the phone's con- End a call by pressing EXIT or by hanging up Privacy handset trols, see page 188. the privacy handset. On/Off Incoming call Safety Switch on the phone with a short press on Press ENTER for handsfree calls or pick up the Only entrust phone servicing to an authorised PHONE . Enter the PIN code if necessary. The privacy handset. If the privacy handset is off Volvo workshop. The built-in phone must be symbol shows that the phone is the hook when the phone rings then calls must switched off during refuelling or in the vicinity be received using ENTER . of blasting work. IDIS limits the menu system switched on. When this symbol is shown calls depending on the speed of the car, see can be received even if the CD menu for exam- End calls by pressing EXIT or by hanging up page 195. ple is shown in the display. Briefly press the privacy handset. Refuse calls using EXIT . PHONE to use the phone menus and to dial

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 194 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone *

Automatic answer Conference call Audio settings See page 190. A conference call consists of several parties. It can be initiated when a call is underway and Phone call volume Call waiting another is on hold. The Join menu option starts The phone uses the front door speakers. Call The function enables a new call to be answered the conference call. volume can be controlled when the text during an ongoing call. The new call is PHONE is shown at the top of the display. answered as usual and the previous call is put All ongoing calls are disconnected if the con- ± Use the steering wheel keypad or on hold. ference call is terminated. VOLUME . ± Activate/deactivate under Phone settings Switching between the privacy handset Call options Call waiting . and handsfree Audio system volume See page137. 04 Switch from handsfree to the privacy handset Automatic diversions by picking up the privacy handset or selecting Signals and volume Incoming calls can be diverted automatically Handset in the menu. Change the ring signal under Phone settings depending on the type of call and situation. Switch from the privacy handset to handsfree Sounds and volume Ring signals . ± Activate/deactivate under Call options using the Handsfree menu option. Diversions . Activate/deactivate the message beep under Mute mode Phone settings Sounds and volume Mute mode involves deactivating the micro- Message beep . During a call phone, see page 193. Phone settings Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access Control the ring volume under the In-call menu. ± Activate/deactivate the microphone using Sounds and volume Ring volume . the Microphone On/Off menu option. Adjust using / on the navigation button. To call 1. Put the call on hold under Hold . 2. Dial the number of the third party or use the Phone book menu option. Switch between calls using the Swap menu option.

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 195 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone *

Phone book Voice mail number Message settings Contact information can be stored on the SIM See page 191. Message settings are not normally changed. card or in the phone. The network provider has further information Other functions and settings on these settings. There are three options Storing contacts in the phone book under Messages Message settings : 1. Press MENU and scroll to Phone book IDIS • SMSC number - Specifies the message New contact . IDIS (Intelligent Driver Information System) centre which will transfer the messages. can, in active driving situations, delay or refuse 2. Enter a name and press ENTER . For infor- • Validity time - Specifies how long the mation on text input, see below. ring signals from incoming calls. This way less attention is distracted from driving. message will be stored in the message 3. Enter a number and press ENTER . centre. IDIS is deactivated under Phone settings 04 ± • Message type . 4. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and IDIS . press ENTER . Call lists Reading messages Inputting text Lists of received, dialled and missed calls are 1. Scroll to Messages Read and press See page 192. stored in Call register . Dialled calls are also ENTER . shown by pressing ENTER . The phone num- Searching for contacts 2. Scroll to a message and press ENTER . bers in the lists can be saved in the phone See page 191. book. 3. The message text is shown in the display. Erasing contacts Additional selections can be made by Call duration Erase a contact in the phone book by selecting pressing ENTER . Call duration is stored under Call register it and pressing ENTER . Then scroll to Erase Call duration . and press ENTER . Writing and sending messages 1. Scroll to Messages Write new and ± Reset the values under Call register Erase all contacts under Phone book Erase press ENTER . Call duration Reset timers . SIM or Erase phone . 2. Enter text and press ENTER . For informa- Show/hide number for third party Copying entries between the SIM card tion on text input, see page 192. The phone number can be temporarily hidden and the phone book 3. Scroll to Send and press ENTER . under Call options Send my number . Go to Phone book Copy all SIM to 4. Enter a phone number and press ENTER . phone or Phone to SIM and press ENTER .

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 196 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

Built-in phone *

IMEI number Select minimum security with the Off option. In order to block a phone the network provider The SIM card can then be used without the must be advised of the phone's IMEI number. code at all. ± Dial *#06# to show the number in the dis- Reset to factory settings play. Write it down and keep it in a safe The phone settings are fully reset under Phone place. settings Reset phone settings . Network selection The network can be selected either automati- Installing the SIM card 1

cally or manually under Phone settings 5 4 1 2 0 04 Network selection . G

SIM code and security Make sure that the phone is deactivated. The PIN code can protect the SIM card from Pull out the SIM card holder which is unauthorised use. located in the glovebox. The code can be changed under Phone Place the SIM card with the metal surface settings Edit PIN code . visible and fit the cover on the SIM card Change the security level under Phone holder . Refit the SIM card holder. 0 5 4 1

settings SIM security . 2 0 G Select maximum security with the On option. The code will then need to be entered each time the phone is switched on. Select the next highest security level with the Automatic option. The phone then stores the code and automatically specifies it when the phone is switched on. When the SIM card is used with another phone the code must be entered manually.

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 197 henrikrosenqvist

04 Comfort and driving pleasure

197 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 198 henrikrosenqvist

Recommendations during driving ...... 200 Refuelling ...... 202 Fuel ...... 203 Loading ...... 206 Cargo area ...... 209 Warning triangle* ...... 213 Driving with a trailer ...... 214 Towing and recovery...... 219

198 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 199 henrikrosenqvist

DURING YOUR JOURNEY 05 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 200 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

General been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly • Maintain a low speed when driving with a and check that full brake function is achieved. trailer up long, steep ascents. Economical driving Water and mud for example can make the • Do not turn the engine off immediately you Economical driving and reducing environmen- brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake stop after a hard drive. tal impact result from driving gently with antic- function. ipation and adapting your driving style and NOTE speed to the current situation (for further Clean the electric contacts of the electric advice on how you can reduce environmental engine block heater and trailer coupling after It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to impact, see page 9). driving in water and mud. operate for a while after the engine has been switched off. • Do not let the engine idle, but drive at light Do not let the car stand with water over the sills loads as soon as it is possible. for any long period of time. This could cause electrical malfunctions. • Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front • A cold engine consumes more fuel than a of the grille when driving in extreme high warm one. IMPORTANT temperatures. • Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the • Do not exceed engine speeds of car. Engine damage can occur if water enters 05 the air filter. 4500 rpm (3500 rpm for diesel engines) if • Do not use winter tyres when the roads are driving with a trailer or caravan in hilly ter- dry. In depths greater than 25 cm, water could rain. The oil temperature could become too enter the transmission. This reduces the high. • Remove the load carrier when it is not in lubricating ability of the oils and shortens use. the service life of the systems. Open tailgate • Use the parking heater * in cold weather so In the event of stalling in water, do not try to Avoid driving with the tailgate open. If it is how- that the engine reaches its normal operat- restart - tow the car out of the water to an ever necessary, only drive for a short distance. ing temperature more quickly. authorised Volvo workshop. Risk of engine Close all windows, set the air distribution to the breakdown. Driving in water windscreen and floor and run the fan at the highest speed. The car can be driven through water at a maxi- Engine and cooling system mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of Under special conditions, for example when 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised WARNING driving in hilly terrain, extreme heat or with when passing through flowing water. heavy loads, there is a risk that the engine and Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic During driving in water, maintain a low speed exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car cooling system will overheat. Proceed as fol- through the cargo area. and do not stop the car. When the water has lows to avoid overheating the engine.

200 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 201 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Recommendations during driving

Do not overload the battery Winter driving To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo rec- The electrical functions in the car load the bat- Check the following in particular before the ommends using winter tyres on all four wheels tery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition cold season: if there is a risk of snow or ice. II position when the engine is switched off. Use • The engine coolant must contain at least ignition position I instead, as less power is con- 50% glycol. This mixture protects the NOTE sumed. engine down to approximately –35 °C. To The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement Also, be aware of different accessories that achieve optimum antifreeze protection, in certain countries. Studded tyres are not load the electrical system. Do not use functions different types of glycol must not be mixed. permitted in certain countries. which use a lot of power when the engine is • The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent switched off. Examples of functions that use a condensation. Slippery driving conditions lot of power: • Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with Practise driving on slippery surfaces under • ventilation fan lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate star- controlled conditions to learn how the car ting in cold weather and also reduce fuel reacts. windscreen wipers • consumption while the engine is cold. For • audio system (high volume) more information on suitable oils, see 05 • parking lamps page 276. If the battery voltage is low, a message appears on the information display. The energy-saving IMPORTANT function shuts down certain functions or Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard reduces certain functions such as the ventila- driving or in hot weather. tion fan and audio system. Charge the battery by starting the engine. • The condition of the battery and charge Before a long journey level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the battery and its Check that the engine is working normally • capacity is reduced by the cold. and that fuel consumption is normal. Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in the Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil • • washer fluid reservoir. or other fluid). • Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths. • Carrying a warning triangle is a legal requirement in certain countries.

201 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 202 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Refuelling

Refuelling Opening/closing the fuel cap Opening the fuel filler flap manually

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap WARNING! ACHTUNG! AVERTISSEMENT! 5 0 9 0 3 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 G G 9 5 4 1 2 0 G A certain overpressure may arise in the tank in The fuel filler flap can be opened manually 05 the event of high outside temperatures. Open when electric opening from the passenger Open the fuel filler flap using the button on the the cap slowly. compartment is not possible. lighting panel. The filler flap is located on the right-hand rear wing, as indicated by the sym- After refuelling, refit the cap and turn it until one Open the side hatch in the cargo area or more clicking sounds are heard. (same side as fuel filler flap). bol's arrow in the information display. Locate the green cord with handle. Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in until a Filling up with fuel Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump click confirms that it is closed. Pull the cord straight back until the fuel filler nozzle cuts out. flap folds out with a "click". NOTE Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

202 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 203 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Fuel

General information on fuel IMPORTANT IMPORTANT Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended The use of other fuels for each respective Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as by Volvo must not be used as engine power • engine type, other than recommended here not to damage the catalytic converter. and fuel consumption is negatively affected. by Volvo, could cause engine damage and impaired performance. • In order that Volvo's warranty shall WARNING remain valid, never mix alcohol with pet- The use of other fuels also invalidates Vol- rol, as the fuel system could be dam- Always avoid inhaling fuel fumes and fuel vo's warranties as well as any supplemen- aged. tary service agreement. splashing in the eyes. • Do not use additives not recommended If fuel gets into your eyes, take out contact by Volvo. lenses if worn and rinse your eyes with NOTE plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Extreme weather conditions, driving with a Catalytic converters trailer or driving at high altitudes in combi- The purpose of the catalytic converters is to Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, nation with fuel grade are factors that could bioethanol and mixtures of the two, as well purify exhaust gases. They are located close to affect the car's performance. the engine so that operating temperature is as diesel, are highly toxic and could cause 05 permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. reached quickly. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel Petrol The catalytic converters consist of a monolith has been swallowed. Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel engines can be run with octane ratings of 95 walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho- WARNING and 98 RON. 91 RON should only be used in dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem- Fuel which spills onto the ground can be exceptional cases. ical reaction without being used up them- ignited. • 95 RON can be used for normal driving. selves. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- • 98 RON is recommended for optimum per- TM ting to refuel. formance and minimum fuel consumption. Lambda-sond oxygen sensor The Lambda-sond is part of a control system Never carry an activated mobile phone When driving in temperatures above +38 °C, intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel when refuelling. The ring signal could cause fuel with the highest possible octane rating is spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, economy. recommended for optimum performance and leading to fire and injury. fuel economy. An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that con-

203 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 204 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Fuel

tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel WARNING IMPORTANT to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted. These adjustments create optimal Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European conditions for efficient combustion, and gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it diesel standard. is refuelled with ethanol. together with the three-way catalytic converter The sulphur content must be a maximum of reduce harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, car- 50 ppm. bon monoxide and nitrous oxides). Diesel Diesel must fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204 IMPORTANT Bioethanol E85 standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to con- Diesel type fuels which must not be used: Do not modify the fuel system or its compo- taminants, such as excessively high volumes nents, and do not replace components with of sulphur particles for example. Only use die- • Special additives parts that are not specifically designed for use sel fuel from well-known producers. Never use • Marine Diesel Fuel with bioethanol. diesel of dubious quality. • Fuel oil At low temperatures (-40 °C to -6 °C), a paraffin • RME 1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegeta- 05 WARNING precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which ble oil. Methanol must not be used. A decal on the may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct fuel designed for low temperatures around accordance with Volvo recommendations alternative fuel. freezing point is available from the major oil and generate increased wear and engine The use of components not designed for companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem- damage that is not covered by the Volvo bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre- warranty. or engine damage. cipitate. The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is Empty tank Reserve fuel can reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When No special procedures are required if the tank The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol, refuelling, check that the area around the fuel runs dry. The fuel system is bled automatically see page 97. filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the if the remote control is kept in key position II paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- (see page 71) for approx. 60 seconds before gent and water. the start attempt.

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.

204 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 205 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Fuel

Draining condensation from the fuel filter Regeneration in cold weather Fuel consumption and emissions of The fuel filter separates condensation from the If the car is frequently driven short distances in carbon dioxide fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera- cold weather then the engine does not reach Fuel consumption figures may change if the car tion. normal operating temperature. This means that is equipped with extra equipment that affects regeneration of the diesel particle filter does The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals the car's weight. See the table on page 281. not take place and the filter is not emptied. specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet The manner in which the car is driven, and or if you suspect that the car has been filled When the filter has become approximately other non-technical factors can also affect fuel with contaminated fuel. 80% full of particles, a warning triangle on the consumption. instrument panel illuminates, and the message Consumption is higher and power output lower IMPORTANT Soot filter full. See manual is shown on the instrument panel display. for fuel with an octane rating of 91 RON. Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter. Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car NOTE until the engine reaches normal operating tem- Extreme weather conditions, towing a trailer Diesel particle filter (DPF) perature, preferably on a main road or motor- way. The car should then be driven for or driving at high altitudes in combination 05 Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter, with fuel grade are factors that could affect approximately ca 20 minutes more. which results in more efficient emission con- the car's performance. trol. The particles in the exhaust gases are When regeneration is complete the warning collected in the filter during normal driving. So- text is cleared automatically. called "regeneration" is started in order to burn Use the parking heater * in cold weather so that away the particles and empty the filter. This the engine reaches normal operating tempera- requires the engine to have reached normal ture more quickly. operating temperature. Regeneration of the filter takes place automat- IMPORTANT ically at an interval of approximately 300-900 km depending on driving conditions. If the filter fills up with particles then it can be difficult to start the engine and the filter Regeneration normally takes 10-20 minutes. It will be incapable of functioning. Then there may take a little longer at a low average speed. is a risk that the filter will have to be Fuel consumption may increase slightly during replaced. regeneration.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 205 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 206 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

General WARNING Securing loads The load capacity is affected by what is moun- The protection provided by the inflatable ted on the car, such as a towbar, load carriers curtain in the headlining may be compro- and roof box. The load capacity of the car is mised or eliminated if the load is too high. also reduced by the number of passengers and Never load cargo above the backrest. Dur- their weight. ing heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants. WARNING The car's driving characteristics change WARNING depending on the weight and distribution of Always secure the load. During heavy brak- 1 0 4 the load. 0 7 0 7 ing the load may otherwise shift, causing 0 1 0 0 0 G injury to the car's occupants. G Loading the cargo area Protect sharp edges with something soft. • Position the load firmly against the back- On both sides of the cargo area there are sev- Turn off the engine and apply the parking 05 rest in front. eral mounting points designed for securing brake when loading or unloading long loads. They are located in the floor and in the • Put wide loads in the centre. objects. Otherwise you may accidentally top edge of both sides of the cargo area. • Heavy objects should be placed as low as knock the gear lever or gear selector with possible. the load and cause a gear to engage and the car to move off. WARNING • Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery. Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are loose or protrude could cause injury during • Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- Lowering the rear seat backrest heavy braking. lets with straps or web lashings. To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear Always secure large and heavy objects with seats of the car can be folded down, see a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps. WARNING page 74. A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg. Always secure the load.

206 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 207 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Floor rails Cargo retaining straps Moving a cargo retaining hook 5 7 2 3 9 4 1 3 7 8 9 7 1 1 1 0 0 0 G G G

Load secured in both upper and lower mounting Strap retention. points. Fold the cargo retaining hook down in the One loop of the cargo retaining strap around direction to which its opening points. 05 In the floor of the cargo area there are two rails one of the cargo retaining hooks secures the with movable cargo retaining hooks for secur- strap and prevents it from sliding around the Press the hook down lightly and at the ing items in the cargo area using cargo retain- hook. same time push it to the required position. ing straps. Fold the hook up – it is self-locking. NOTE IMPORTANT A suitable width for a cargo retaining strap NOTE Do not use other adjustable straps as these is approx. 25 mm. could pull and break the mounting points. There must be at least 50 cm between the cargo retaining hooks in the rail.

Cleaning Dirt and objects collecting down in the rails could hinder the repositioning, locking, raising and removal of the cargo retaining hooks. Make it a habit to clean the tracks with a vacuum cleaner and a lightly-moistened soft cloth.

207 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 208 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Removing a cargo retaining hook Cargo retaining hook correctly fitted/ incorrectly fitted 4 3 1 8 1 0 1 G 8 5 9 1 0 G The cargo retaining hooks can be easily Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly! 05 removed from the rail, e.g. for cleaning the bottom of the rail. It is important that the cargo retaining hooks are fitted correctly. The hooks' openings must Fold the cargo retaining hook down in the point away from each other. direction to which its opening points. Press the hook down lightly and at the WARNING same time slide it to the cut-out opening. Fit the cargo retaining hooks correctly. Oth- Lift the hook straight up. erwise the cargo retaining strap will move the cargo retaining hook down so that it Securing the hook takes place in reverse order. loosens and the strap slides off.

NOTE A removed hook must be pressed down lightly at the same time in order to enable its reinsertion into the rail.

208 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 209 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Cargo area

Bag holder * Safety grille * Installation 7 6 3 8 1 0 G 5 8 4 4 7 7 7 7 1 1 0 0 G G

Bag holder under folding hatch in the floor. A protective grille prevents cargo from being The bag holder keeps carrier bags in place and thrown forward in the passenger compartment 05 prevents them from overturning and spreading in the event of heavy braking. For safety rea- their contents across the cargo area. sons, the grille must always be mounted and 8 6 3 8 1

secured correctly. 0

1. Open the hatch that is part of the floor in G the cargo area. Folding up 2. Tension and secure the carrier bags using Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille and the strap. pull back/up.

IMPORTANT The safety grille cannot be folded up or down when the cargo cover is fitted. 9 6 3 8 1 0 G

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 210 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Cargo area

NOTE Safety net * The two-part safety net cassette is secured on the rear of the backrest. The narrowest cas- The safety grille is most easily fitted and sette is secured on the left-hand side (seen removed by two people via the rear doors. from the tailgate). When fitting, the handle, see illustration 1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward. – , must be on the front of the grille. 2. Align the cassette's anchor rails in front of the backrest attachment lugs . The backrests must be lowered to allow the safety grille to be fitted, see page 74. 3. Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs Position the handle in fitting position, see . 8 2 6

illustration. Press gently on the handle to 4

2 4. Fold back and lock the backrests. 0 enable it to be turned into position, see G arrow. Removing the cassettes takes place in reverse Storage space, safety net cassettes. order Press the strut in towards the grille and 05 A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes align the grille in the roof mounting. has a storage space under the cargo area floor Using the safety net Turn the handle 90° . Press gently as hatch. illustrated if necessary. Secure the grille Securing the net cassettes by angling the handle 90° .

Removal Removal of the grille takes place in reverse order to the description in the previous section entitled "Installation". 6 4 2 8 1 0 G 0 0

0 Pull the net up from the cassettes. The net is 0 0 0 G self-locking after about 1 minute if the rear seat's backrests are raised.

210 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 211 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Cargo area

Pull up the right-hand section of the net Safety net combined with cargo cover Cargo cover * using its strap. Insert the rod in the mounting on the right- hand side and then press it forward – the rod locks in with a click. Pull out the rod's telescope section and click it in on the other side. Pull up the left-hand safety net and hook it into the rod. 7 9 4 4 2 7

Folding up takes place in reverse order. 8 7 1 1 0 0 G The net can also be used when the rear seat's G backrest is folded forward. Puller-straps for raising the net. Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it The safety net can also be raised from the rear Removing the net cassettes into the holes by the rear pillars in the cargo 05 seat when the cargo cover is extended. 1. Roll the safety nets into the cassettes in area. accordance with the procedure in the sec- Follow the procedure in the section entitled tion entitled "Using the safety net", but in Using the safety net. The straps for raising are IMPORTANT reverse. located by the arrows. The safety grille cannot be folded up or 2. Fold the whole backrest forward. down when the cargo cover is fitted. 3. Slide the cassettes out until they loosen from the anchor rails. Fitting the cargo cover Move one end piece of the cover into the Store the cassettes in their compartment under recess on the side panel. the cargo area floor hatch. Move the other end piece into the corres- WARNING ponding recess. The load in the cargo area must be securely Press both sides in. A "click" should be anchored, even with a correctly fitted safety audible and the red marking should disap- net. pear.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 212 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Cargo area

> Check that both end pieces are locked. • Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the Removing the cargo cover load securely with retaining straps. 1. Press in one end piece button and lift it out. • Distribute the load evenly over the load 2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the other end piece loosens automatically. bottom. • The size of the area exposed to the wind, Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing and therefore fuel consumption, increase disc with the size of the load. In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear • Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the heavy braking and hard cornering. cargo area when it is fitted. ± Pull the sealing disc back gently, free from WARNING its support shelves, and lower. The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- 05 racteristics are altered by roof loads. Long load For information on maximum permitted roof The passenger seat backrest can also be load, including load carriers and any space folded for an extra long load, see page 72. box, see page 270.

Roof load Using load carriers To avoid damaging the car and for maximum possible safety while driving, the load carriers designed by Volvo are recommended. Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers.

212 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 213 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Warning triangle *

Take the warning triangle from the case, A case with first aid equipment is located under fold out and assemble the two loose sides. the floor in the cargo area. Fold out the warning triangle's support legs. Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suit- 6 5 9

7 able place with regard to traffic. 1 0 G Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use.

NOTE If the floor hatch is not closed then privacy locking does not work, see page 45. 05 2 5 3 5

1 First aid * 0 G 3 5 3 5 1 0 G 3 5 2 8 1 0 G Lift the floor mat and take out the warning triangle.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 214 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

General nated and the information display shows Trailer cable If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo, then High engine temp Stop safely . Stop the An adapter is required if the car's towing the car is delivered with the necessary equip- car in a safe way and allow the engine to bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has ment for driving with a trailer. run at idling speed for several minutes and 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved cool down. If High engine temp Stop by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag The car's towing bracket must be of an • engine or Coolant level low, Stop on the ground. approved type. engine are shown then the engine must be • If the towbar is retrofitted, check with your switched off after stopping the car. Direction indicators on trailer Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped • The automatic gearbox has a built-in pro- A symbol in the combined instrument panel for driving with a trailer. tection system that engages in the event of flashes when the direction indicators are used • Distribute the load on the trailer so that the overheating. If the temperature in the gear- and the trailer is connected. If the symbol weight on the towing bracket complies box is too high the warning symbol is illu- flashes more quickly then one of the lamps on with the specified maximum towball load. minated and the information display shows the car or the trailer is broken, see page 66. Transmission hot Reduce speed or • Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- Automatic gearbox mended pressure for a full load. For tyre Transmission hot Stop safely . Follow 05 pressure label location, see page 259. the instructions and reduce speed or stop Parking on a hill the car in a safe way and allow the engine 1. Activate the parking brake. • Clean the towing bracket regularly and to run at idling speed for several minutes to grease the towball. enable the gearbox to cool down. In the 2. Move the gear selector to position P. • Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is event of overheating the car's air condi- Starting on a hill brand new. Wait until it has been driven at tioning may be temporarily switched off. 1. Move the gear selector to position D. least 1000 km. In the interests of safety, you should • 2. Release the parking brake. • The brakes are loaded much more than restrict speed to 80 km/h, even if the laws usual on long and steep downhill slopes. of certain countries allow for higher Steep inclines Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speeds. • Do not use a higher manual gear than the speed. • Move the gear selector to position P when engine can "handle". It is not always eco- • The engine is loaded more heavily than parking an automatic car with a hitched nomical to drive in high gears. usual when driving with a trailer. trailer. Always use the parking brake. Block • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of • If the car is driven with a heavy load in a hot the wheels with chocks when parking a car more than 15%. climate, the engine may overheat. If the with hitched trailer on a hill. temperature in the engine's cooling system is too high the warning symbol is illumi-

214 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 215 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

Level control WARNING Storing the towball section The rear shock absorbers maintain a constant height irrespective of the car's load (up to the If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar: maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, • Follow the assembly instructions for the which is normal. towball section carefully. • The towball section must be locked with Trailer weights the key before setting off. National vehicle regulations can limit trailer Check that the indicator window shows weights and speeds. The towbar can be certi- • green. fied for a higher towing weight than the car can 1 2 1 actually tow. For Volvo's permitted trailer 1 3 0 weights, see page 271. Important checks G • The towball section's towball must be Towball section storage location WARNING cleaned and greased regularly. IMPORTANT 05 Follow the stated recommendations for NOTE trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer Always remove the towball section after use may be difficult to control in the event of If a towball hitch with vibration damper is and store it in the appointed location in the sudden movement and braking. used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- car, firmly fastened with its strap. ball.

Towing bracket If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar, the towball mounting instructions must be followed carefully, see page 216.

215 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 216 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer

Specifications Installing the towball

C 8 2

D 9 8 1 0 G 1 7 9 7 1 G 0 5 E F G 8 4

1 Remove the protective cover by first press- 2 0 G ing in the catch and then pulling the Dimensions, mounting points (mm) cover straight back . B 05 A (V70) 1129 A (XC70) 1113

B (V70) 93

B (XC70) 77 7 8 4 1

C 855 2 0 G 0 8 0

A 6 D 428 2 0 G Ensure that the mechanism is in the E 112 unlocked position by turning the key clock- F 346 wise.

G Side member

H Ball centre

216 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 217 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer 8 0 4 8 9 9 4 4 4 1 1 1 2 2 2 0 0 0 G G G

The indicator window must show red. The indicator window must show green. Check that the towball section is secure by pulling it up, down and back.

WARNING If the towball section is not fitted correctly then it must be removed and refitted in 05 accordance with the previous instructions. 9 0 8 0 4 0 1 0 2 0

0 0 IMPORTANT G G Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, Insert the towball section until you hear a Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi- the remainder of the towball section should click. tion. Remove the key from the lock. be clean and dry.

217 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 218 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Driving with a trailer 7 9 5 9 2 9 4 9 4 1 8 1 2 1 2 0 0 0 G G G

Safety cable. Push in the locking wheel and turn it Push the protective cover until it snaps anticlockwise until you hear a click. tight. WARNING Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to the correct place. 05

Removing the towball 8 9 4 1 2 0 G

Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towball rearward and upward. 6 9 4 1 2 0 G WARNING

Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the Secure the towbar's loose towball safely if it is stored in the car, see page 215. unlocked position.

218 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 219 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Towing and recovery

Towing WARNING IMPORTANT Find out the highest legal speed for towing The brake servo and power steering do not Bump starting the car can damage the cat- before towing the car. work when the engine is switched off. The alytic converter. 1. Press the remote control key into the igni- brake pedal must be pressed about five tion switch to unlock the steering lock so times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal. that the car can be steered, see page 96. Towing eye Use the towing eye if the car needs to be towed 2. The remote control key must remain in the Manual gearbox on the road. The towing eye is attached in the ignition switch while the car is being towed. ± Move gear lever into neutral and release recess on the right-hand side of the front or 3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gently the parking brake. rear bumper. depressing the brake pedal to avoid violent After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it jerks. Automatic gearbox into the cargo area. ± Move the gear selector to position N and 4. Be prepared to brake to stop. release the parking brake. Fitting the towing eye 05 WARNING IMPORTANT Insert the remote control key in the ignition Note that the car must always be towed with switch to unlock the steering lock (so that the wheels rolling forward. the car can be steered) before towing. • Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or WARNING further than 80 km. The steering lock stays in the position it was in when the power was cut off. The steering Jump starting 4

lock must be unlocked before towing. The 6 4

Do not tow the car to bump start it. Use a donor 7 1 ignition must be in position II . Never remove 0 G the remote control key from the ignition battery if the battery is discharged to the extent switch while driving or when the car is being that the engine does not start, see page 99. towed. Take out the towing eye that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

219 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 220 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

Towing and recovery

Recovery

IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward. • An all-wheel drive car (AWD) with raised 1 0 5

1 front suspension must not be towed at 2 0 G speeds above 70 km/h. It should not be towed further than 50 km. For the V70: Press the marked edge of the cover into the bumper and release. Fold aside the cover and screw in the towing WARNING eye firmly, right in up to the flange. The towing eye is only designed for towing For the XC70: Release the bottom edge of on roads - not for recovering the car. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. 05 the cover on the bumper with a screwdriver or coin. Screw in the towing eye firmly, right in up to the flange. Use the wheel wrench to tighten the towing eye.

NOTE On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar. For this reason it is advisable to store a detachable towbar towball in the car.

220 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 221 henrikrosenqvist

05 During your journey

221 2 h V enrikosqv 70/XC (Y285/ W Fuse Lam Bater Engie W Car Type S Type st pecif h iper Y381); els ca ps desig aprov . y icat blad re...... com and 9; ions. . es . natios 3 part . . tyres. . and l ...... ment ...... washer ...... flu ...... id ...... 269 . 249 . 263 . .. 241 238 24 236 29 267 28 20 8-0325T 08: 16:38+0 0; Pa ge 2 2 G02092 2 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 223 henrikrosenqvist

MAINTENANCE AND SPECIFICATIONS 06 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 224 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

General WARNING Pull the handle by the pedals. You will hear when the catch releases. Volvo service programme Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start To keep the car as safe and reliable as possi- automatically some time after the engine Move the catch to the left and open the ble, follow the Volvo service programme as has been switched off. bonnet. (The catch hook is located specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Always have the engine cleaned by a work- between the headlamp and grille, see illus- Have an authorised Volvo workshop carry out shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is tration.) service and maintenance work. Volvo work- hot. shops have the personnel, special tools and WARNING service literature to guarantee the highest qual- Opening and closing the bonnet Check that the bonnet locks properly when ity of service. closed.

IMPORTANT Engine compartment, overview For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet. 2 0 5 1

Check regularly 2 0 Check the following oils and fluids at regular G 06 intervals, e.g. when refuelling: • Coolant • Engine oil 5 4

Power steering fluid 9

• 8 1 0 • Washer fluid G The appearance of the engine compartment may 1 5

9 vary depending on engine variant. 0 1 0 G Coolant expansion tank Power steering fluid reservoir

224 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 225 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

Engine oil dipstick Checking the engine oil IMPORTANT Radiator In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are Filler opening for engine oil filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand has been made very carefully with regard to drive) service life, starting characteristics, fuel Battery consumption and environmental impact. An approved engine oil must be used in order Relay and fuse box, engine compartment that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of

Filling washer fluid 3 oil (see the engine compartment decal) for 3 7 1 2 0 both filling and oil change, otherwise you G Air filter. will risk affecting service life, starting cha- Decal for oil grade. racteristics, fuel consumption and environ- WARNING mental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis- Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. When claims all warranty liability if engine oil of the High voltage output from the ignition sys- driving under adverse conditions, see prescribed grade and viscosity is not used. tem. The voltage in the ignition system is page 275. highly dangerous. The remote control key must therefore always be in position 0 dur- Volvo uses different systems for warning of low ing work in the engine compartment, see oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants 06 page 71. have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils when the remote control key is in ignition oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed position II or when the engine is hot. via the warning symbol in the centre of the instrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer- tain models have both variants. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information.

225 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 226 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

Filling and dipstick IMPORTANT time to run back to the sump. For capacities, see page 275 and onwards. When filling oil to top up, the oil being filled must have the same grade, see page 275. Checking with a cold engine 1. Wipe the dipstick clean. Checking the oil level in a new car is especially 2. Check the level using the dipstick. It must important before the first scheduled oil change. be between the MIN and MAX marks. The most accurate measurements are made on 3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start a cold engine before starting. The measure- by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up ment will be inaccurate if taken immediately until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN

4 after the engine is switched off. The dipstick

3 on the dipstick. 7 1 2 0

G will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the IMPORTANT Petrol engine. oil sump. Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil consumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.

WARNING 06 Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

Checking with a warm engine 6 3 7 7

3 1. Wipe the dipstick clean. 1 7 2 1 0 2 G 0 G 2. Check the oil level using the dipstick. Diesel engine. The oil level must be within the area marked on the 3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start Change in accordance with the intervals speci- dipstick. by topping up with 0.5 litres of oil. Top up fied in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Park the car on a level surface, switch off the until the level is nearer to MAX than MIN engine and wait 10-15 minutes to allow the oil on the dipstick.

226 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 227 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

Coolant IMPORTANT not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage to the engine. Checking and topping up the coolant • A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in WARNING the cooling system. • Always use coolant with anti-corrosion Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant agent as recommended by Volvo. requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- • Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% sion tank cap slowly to gently release the water and 50% coolant. overpressure. • Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed Brake and clutch fluid 8

3 coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- 7 1

2 Checking the level 0

G ommendations. Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- • When changing coolant/replacing cool- voir. The level must be between the MIN and When topping up the coolant, follow the ing system components, flush the cool- MAX marks that are visible inside the reservoir. instructions on the packaging. It is important ing system clean with approved quality Check the level regularly. that the mixture of coolant concentrate and tap water or flush with ready-mixed water is correct for the prevailing weather con- coolant. Change the brake fluid every other year or at ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk • The engine must only be run with a well- every other regular service. 06 of freezing increases with both too little and too filled cooling system. High tempera- For capacities and recommended fluid grade, much coolant concentrate. For capacities, see tures can occur, causing a risk of see page 277. The fluid should be changed page 277. damage (cracks) to the cylinder head. annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in For capacities and for standards regarding mountains or tropical climates with high water quality, see page 277. humidity. Check the coolant regularly The level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. If the system is

227 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 228 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Engine compartment

WARNING MAX marks, which are located on the ties and recommended fluid grade, see inside of the reservoir. page 277. If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The rea- IMPORTANT NOTE son for the loss of brake fluid must be inves- Remember to close the cap. If a fault should arise in the power steering tigated by an authorised Volvo workshop. system or if the engine is switched off and the car must be towed, it can still be steered. Filling Power steering fluid 0 9 4 3 7 9 1 8 2 1 0 0 G 06 G The fluid reservoir is located on the driver's side The fluid reservoir is protected under the cover IMPORTANT over the cold section in the engine compart- Keep the area around the power steering ment. The round cover must be removed first fluid reservoir clean when checking. before the reservoir cap can be reached. 1. Turn and open the cover located on the Check the level frequently. The fluid does not covering. require changing. The fluid level must be 2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the fluid. between the MIN and MAX marks. For capaci- The level must be between the MIN and

228 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 229 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

General Front lamp housing Removing the headlamp All bulb specifications are given on page 234. 1. Press quickly on the START /STOP but- The following list contains bulbs and point- ton and remove the remote control key. source lamps that are specialised or unsuitable 2. (Upper illustration) for changing except at a workshop: Withdraw the lamp housing's locking General interior lighting in the roof, reading • pins. lamps 9

7 Pull the lamp housing straight forward. Glovebox lighting 4

• 0 1 0 • Direction indicators, door mirror G IMPORTANT • Approach light duration • Brake light, fog lamp, reversing lamp Do not pull the electrical cable, only the connector • Rear side position lamps, position lamps • Active Bi-Xenon , Bi-Xenon lights 3. (Lower illustration) • LED lamps, general Detach the lamp housing connector by

5 pressing down the clip with your thumb. 2 3

WARNING 0 1 0 G At the same time, guide out the con- On cars with Bi-Xenon and Active Bi-Xenon 06 headlamps, Xenon lamp replacement must nector with your other hand. be carried out at an authorised Volvo work- All front bulbs (except those for fog lamps) are 4. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a shop. The headlamps must be handled with replaced by first removing the whole lamp extreme care due to the Xenon lamp's high- housing from the engine compartment. soft surface to avoid scratching the lens. voltage unit. 5. Replace the bulb in question, see WARNING page 234. IMPORTANT Always switch off the ignition and remove Installing the headlamp the remote control key before starting to Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with replace a bulb. 1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound your fingers. Grease and oils from your fin- should be heard. gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

229 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 230 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

2. Reinstall the lamp housing and locking Dipped beam, halogen Main beam, Halogen pins. Check that they are correctly inserted. 3. Check the lighting. The lamp housing must be plugged in and installed before the lighting is switched on or the remote control key is inserted into the ignition switch.

Removing the cover 6 7 4 4 7 7 1 1 2 2 0 0 G G

1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Detach the headlamp. 2. Remove the cover. 2. Remove the cover. 3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder 3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise. downwards. 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. 06 5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket

5 5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It 4 7 1 2

0 in. It can only be secured in one position. can only be secured in one position. G Reinstall the parts in reverse order. Reinstall the parts in reverse order. Before starting to replace a bulb, see page 229. 1. Open the lock clamp by pressing up/out. 2. Press down the clips on the cover and remove it. Reinstall the cover in reverse order.

230 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 231 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

Extra main beam Active Bi-Xenon and Position/parking lamps Direction indicators/flashers

Bi-Xenon * 9 0 4 5 7 7 1 1 2 2 0 0 G G 8 4 7 1 2 0 G 1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Detach the headlamp. 1. Detach the headlamp. 2. Remove the cover, see page 230. 2. Remove the small round cover. 2. Remove the cover, see page 230. 3. For better access, detach the main beam 3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the 3. Detach the bulb by pressing the holder bulb first. bulb. downwards. 4. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb 4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one. 06 4. Unplug the connector from the bulb. holder. It can only be installed in one way. 5. Fit the new bulb in the socket and snap it 5. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one. 5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press in. It can only be secured in one position. It can only be secured in one position. until a clicking sound is heard. Reinstall the parts in reverse order. 6. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press 6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and until a clicking sound is heard. pressed in until a clicking sound is heard. Reinstall the parts in reverse order. Reinstall the parts in reverse order.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 232 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

Side marker lamps Front fog lamps Lamp housing, rear, direction indicators 1 5 5 1 7 0 1 6 2 2 0 0 6 G G 5 4 7 1 0 G Before starting to replace a bulb, see 1. Remove the cover by pressing in the 4 clips page 229. with a thin blade and pulling straight out. The direction indictor bulb in the rear lamp 1. Detach the headlamp. 2. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull cluster is replaced from inside the cargo area. it out. 2. Remove the small round cover. 1. Open the panel. 3. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it. 2. Remove the insulation by pulling it straight 06 3. Pull the cable in order to withdraw the bulb holder. 4. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise. out. 4. Remove the blown bulb and fit a new one. 5. Refit the bulb. (The profile of the bulb 3. Loosen the whole of the lamp by turning its It can only be installed in one way. holder corresponds to the profile of the handle anticlockwise. foot of the bulb.) 5. Fit the bulb holder in the socket and press 4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out. until a clicking sound is heard. 6. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the Reinstall the parts in reverse order. bulb holder must always be upward. 6. Refit the cover. It must be fitted and pressed in until a clicking sound is heard. NOTE Reinstall the parts in reverse order. If an error message remains after a faulty bulb has been replaced, contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

232 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 233 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

Location of rear bulbs Number plate lighting Courtesy lighting 7 8 7 5 5 5 4 4 7 7 7 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 G G G

Lamp lens, right-hand side 1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver. Before starting to replace a bulb, see Position lamps/brake light (LED) page 229. 2. Carefully detach the entire lamp housing Side position lights, SML (LED) and withdraw it. 1. Insert a screwdriver at the short end of the lens closest to the tunnel console and turn Direction indicators 3. Replace the bulb. gently so that the lens comes loose. Reflector, rear 4. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it (Applies to both lamps). 06 into place. Rear fog lamp (one side) 2. Turn carefully until the lens comes loose. 3. Replace the bulb. Reversing lamp 4. Refit the lens. Brake light (LED) Brake light (LED)

233 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 234 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

Lighting, cargo area Vanity mirror lighting 2. Then press the three lower lugs back into position. Removing the mirror glass Specification, bulbs Lighting Out- Type put (W) Extra main beam, 55 H7 Bi Xenon , ABL 9 5 4 7 1 0

G Dipped beam, hal- 55 H7 9 5 7

1 ogen 2 0 G 1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so Main beam, Halo- 65 H9 that the lamp housing comes loose. 1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower gen 2. Replace the bulb. edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the Front direction 21 H21W lug on the edge. 3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press indicators back the lamp housing. 2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge 06 on the left and right-hand sides (by the Direction indica- 21 PY21W black rubber sections), and prize carefully tors, rear so that the glass comes loose in the lower Front fog lamps 35 H8 edge. 3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire Courtesy lighting, 5 Tubular mirror glass and cover. cargo area lighting, lamp number plate light- SV8.5 4. Replace the bulb. ing Fitting the mirror glass 1. Press the three lugs at top edge of the mirror glass back into position.

234 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 235 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Lamps

Lighting Out- Type put (W) Vanity mirror 1.2 Tubular lamp SV5.5

Front position and 5 W5W parking lamps

Front side marker 5 W5W lamps

Glovebox lighting 5 Tubular lamp SV8.5

235 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 236 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

Wiper blades Service position The wiper blades must be in service position to facilitate replacement or washing. 1. Turn the remote control key to position 0,

see page 71, and keep the remote control 1 6 7 1 2 key in the ignition switch. 0 G 2. Move the right-hand stalk switch up for 3 6 7

about 1 second. The wipers then move to 1 2 0 standing straight up. G The wipers return to the starting position when the car is started. NOTE Replacing the wiper blades The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than the 2 6 7

1 blade on the passenger side. 2 0 G

06 Turn up the wiper arm. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm. 0 6 7

1 Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" 2 0 G is heard. Check that the blade is firmly installed.

236 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 237 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wiper blades and washer fluid

Replacing the wiper blades, rear window IMPORTANT Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades.

Filling washer fluid 0 7 7 2 3 0 G

1. Fold out the wiper arm. 2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the arrow). 4 6 7 1 2

3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end 0 position against the wiper arm as a lever to G detach the blade more easily. 06 The windscreen and headlamp washers share 4. Press the new wiper blade into position. a common reservoir. Check that it is firmly installed. 5. Lower the wiper arm. IMPORTANT Add washer antifreeze during the winter so Cleaning that the fluid does not freeze in the pump, For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see reservoir and hoses. page 263. For capacities, see page 277.

237 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 238 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

Warning symbols on the battery Avoid sparks and naked IMPORTANT Use protective goggles flames. Never use a quick charger to charge the battery.

WARNING Risk of explosion. Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which Further information in the can be generated if you connect jump leads owner's manual. incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities NOTE of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek Store the battery out of medical attention immediately. the reach of children. An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally responsible manner - it contains lead. NOTE The life of the battery is shortened if it 06 becomes discharged repeatedly. Operation The battery contains cor- • Check that the cables to the battery are rosive acid. correctly connected and properly tightened. • Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running. The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.

238 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 239 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

Changing WARNING Removal Connect and disconnect the positive and negative cables in the correct sequence. 8 6

7 Detach the black negative cable 1 2 0 G Detach the red positive cable 5 6 7 1 2 0

G Detach the ventilation hose from the battery Loosen the screw holding the battery clamp. Move the battery to the side and lift it up. 9 6 7 1 2 0

G Installation 6 6 7

1 Switch off the ignition and wait for 5 minutes. 2 06 0 G Open the clips on the front cover and remove the cover. Release the rubber moulding so that the rear cover is free. Remove the rear cover by screwing one quarter turn and lifting it away. 1 7 7 1 2 0 7 G 6 7 1 2 0 G 1. Lower the battery into the battery box.

239 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 240 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Battery

2. Move the battery inward and to the side until it reaches the rear edge of the box. 3. Screw in the battery with the screw in the clamp. 4. Connect the ventilation hose. 5. Connect the red positive cable. 6. Connect the black negative cable. 7. Press in the rear cover. (See Removal). 8. Reinstall the rubber moulding. (See Removal). 9. Reinstall the front cover and secure it with the clips. (See Removal).

240 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 241 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

General Location, fuse boxes All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. In which case, contact an author- 1 ised Volvo workshop to have the system 6 4 7 1 0 checked. G Changing Location of fuse boxes, left-hand drive 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse. If the car is right-hand drive, the fuse box 2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side changes to under the side of the glovebox. to see whether the curved wire has blown. Under the glovebox 3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse Engine compartment of the same colour and amperage. 06 Cargo area WARNING Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

241 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 242 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Engine compartment

06 0 0 6 5 2 0 G

242 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 243 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

General fuses, engine compartment Pos Function A Pos Function A On the inside of the cover are tweezers that facilitate the removal and fitting of fuses. Primary fuse RJBD KL30 50 Speed related power 5 steering Positions (see preceding illustration) Reserve Engine compartment, upper Engine Control Module 10 PTC Air preheater* 100 (ECM), transm. SRS Engine compartment, front Heated washer nozzles 10 Engine compartment, lower Reserve These fuses are all located in the engine com- Windscreen wipers 30 Vacuum pump I5T 20 partment box. Fuses in are located under Parking heater* 25 Lighting panel 5 . • Fuses 1 – 7 and 42 – 44 are of the "Midi Ventilation fan 40 Headlamp washers 15 Fuse" type and must only be replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop. Reserve 12 V socket, front and rear 15 seat 8 – 15 and 34 are of the "JCASE" type and • ABS pump 40 must only be replaced by an authorised Sunroof*, Roof console/ 5 Volvo workshop. ECC* ABS valves 20 06 16 – 33 and 35 – 41 are of the "MiniFuse" • Relay, engine compart- 5 type. Reserve ment box Pos Function A Headlamp levelling* 10 Auxiliary lamps* 20 Primary fuse CEM KL30A 50 (Active Bi-Xenon , Bi- Xenon ) Horn 15 Primary fuse CEM KL30B 50 Primary fuse CEM 20 Engine Control Module 10 Primary fuse RJBA KL30 60 (ECM) Radar, ACC control mod- 5 Primary fuse RJBB KL30 60 ule* Control module, auto- 15 matic gearbox*

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 244 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Pos Function A Pos Function A Compressor A/C 15 EVAP, Lambda-sond, 15 Injection (petrol) Relay coils 5 Lambda-sond (4-cyl. pet- 10 Starter motor relay 30 rol, 5-cyl. diesel)

Ignition coils 20 Crankcase ventilation 10 Glow system (5-cyl. die- 10 heater (5-cyl. petrol) sel) Diesel filter heater, crank- 15 EGR, VTC, Bypass engine 10 case ventilation heater (4- cooling system (4-cyl. die- cyl. diesel) sel) Diesel filter heater, crank- 20 Engine control module, 10 case ventilation heater (5- Throttle petrol cyl. diesel)

Engine control module, 15 Not used 5 06 Throttle diesel Glow plugs (4-cyl. diesel) 60 Injection system, Mass air 15 flow sensor Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70

Mass air flow sensor (4- 10 Reserve cyl. diesel) Cooling fan (4 – 5-cyl. pet- 60 Engine valves 10 rol, 4-cyl. diesel) Cooling fan (V8, 6-cyl. pet- 80 rol, 5-cyl diesel)

244 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 245 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Under the glovebox

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 8 1 9 2 3 0 G

1. Fold aside the interior trim covering the Pos Function A Pos Function A fuse box. Accelerator pedal*, air 7,5 Main beam 15 2. Press the cover's lock and fold it up. 06 heater (PTC), heated 3. The fuses are accessible. seats* Sunroof* 20

Positions Reserve Reversing lamps 7,5 Pos Function A ICM display, CD & Radio A, 15 Reserve Rain sensor* 5 RSE system* Fog lamp, front* 15 SRS system 10 Steering wheel module 7,5 Windscreen washers 15 ABS brakes, electric park- 5 Reserve ing brake

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 245 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 246 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Pos Function A Pos Function A Adaptive cruise control, 10 Start/stop button 5 ACC* Brake light switch 5 Reserve A Premium. Roof lighting, control panel 7,5 driver's door/Power passenger seat*

Information display 5

Power driver's seat* 5

Windscreen wiper, rear 15

Remote control key 5 receiver, alarm sensors

Fuel pump 20 06 Electric steering lock 20

Reserve

Lock, tank/tailgate 10

Alarm siren, ECC 5

246 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 247 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Cargo area 9 1 9 2 3 0 G

The fuse box is located behind the upholstery Pos Module (black). A Pos Module (black). A on the left-hand side. Function Function Positions 06 Control panel, rear door, 25 Trailer socket 2* 15 Pos Module (black). A right Function Power seat driver's side* 25 Reserve Control panel, driver's door 25 Trailer socket 1* 40 12 V socket, cargo area, 15 Control panel, passenger 25 refrigerator* POT (automatic tailgate 30 door opening)* Rear window defroster 30 Control panel, rear door, left 25 Reserve

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 248 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Fuses

Pos Module (white). A Pos Module (blue). Func- A Function tion Reserve Display RTI*, parking cam- 10 era* Control module Four C* 15 Reserve Seat heating, driver's side 15 front* Bass speaker* 25

Seat heating, passenger side 15 Reserve front* Audio amplifier* 25 Seat heating right rear* 15 Audio system A 15 AWD control module 10 Phone, Bluetooth* 5 Seat heating left rear* 15 Reserve Reserve - 06 Power seat passenger side* 25

Keyless drive* 20 A High Performance and Premium.

Electric parking brake, left 30

Electric parking brake, right 30

248 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 249 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

General NOTE New tyres Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte- Ensure that tyres of the same type and ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pres- dimensions, and also the same make, are sure and speed rating are important for how the fitted to all four wheels. car performs. Direction of rotation Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified in the tyre pressure table, see page 260.

Tyre care 3 2 8 1 2 0 Tyre age G All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem Tyres are perishable. After a few years they undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even begin to harden at the same time as the friction if they are hardly ever or never used. The func- capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. 8 7 7

1 For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as

2 tion can therefore be affected. This also applies 0 G to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres saved for possible when you replace them. This is espe- future use. Examples of external signs which cially important with regard to winter tyres. The The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. 06 indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are week and year of manufacture, the tyre's DOT Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed cracks or discoloration. marking (Department of Transportation), are to only turn in one direction have the direction stated with four digits, for example 1502. The of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre must tyre in the illustration was manufactured in always rotate in the same direction throughout week 15 of 2002. its lifespan. Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never Summer and winter tyres between left and right-hand sides, or vice When summer and winter wheels are changed versa. If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the the wheels should be marked with which side car's braking characteristics and capacity to of the car they were mounted on, for example force rain and slush out of the way are L for left and R for right. adversely affected.

249 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 250 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

Wear and maintenance Tyres with tread wear indicators Only use rims that are tested and approved by The correct tyre pressure results in more even Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accesso- wear, see page 259. Driving style, tyre pres- ries. Check the torque with a torque wrench. sure, climate and road condition affect how Locking wheel bolts quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif- Locking wheel bolts can be used on both alu- ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear minium and steel rims. patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km Winter tyres and then at 10 000 km intervals. Contact an Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular authorised Volvo workshop if you are uncertain dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent 9 2 8 1

about tread depth. 2 0 on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, G Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging the correct tyres must be fitted to all four wheels. up - and not standing up. Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread. On the WARNING side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear NOTE A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down Ask a Volvo dealer which rim and tyre types of the car. to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height are most suitable. with the tread wear indicators. Change to new 06 tyres as soon as possible. Remember that Studded tyres tyres with little tread depth provide very poor Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for grip in rain and snow. 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into Rims and wheel bolts the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life. IMPORTANT NOTE The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the The legal provisions for the use of studded nuts and the bolts. tyres vary from country to country.

250 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 251 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

Tread depth When the car is driven at about 40 km/h the NOTE Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- system detects the tyre pressure. If the pres- peratures place considerably higher demands sure is too low then a warning lamp on the The engine must not be running. on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo there- instrument panel illuminates and a message is fore recommends not to drive on winter tyres shown on the display. Settings are made in the controls in the centre that have a tread depth of less than 4 millime- Always check the system after changing a console, see page 118. tres. wheel in order to ensure that replacement 1. Inflate the tyres to the required pressure wheels work with the system. and select key position I or II . Using snow chains For information on correct tyre pressure, see 2. Select Car settings Tyre pressure Snow chains may only be used on the front page 259. wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). 3. Select Calibrate tyre pressure . The system does not replace normal tyre main- Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow tenance. 4. Press ENTER . chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this 5. Drive the car at least at 40 km/h in total for wears out both the snow chains and tyres. IMPORTANT at least 1 minute. Never use quick-fit snow chains as the space between the brake discs and the wheels is too If a fault should arise in the tyre pressure Rectifying low tyre pressure system a warning lamp on the instrument small. When the message LOW TYRE PRESS panel will illuminate. The message TYRE PRESS. SYST SERVICE REQUIRED will CHECK TYRES is shown on the display IMPORTANT be shown. This can be for various reasons, 1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres. 06 Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- e.g. fitting a wheel not equipped with a sen- 2. Inflate the tyre(s) to the correct pressure. lent chains designed for the car model, and sor adapted for Volvo's tyre pressure monitoring system. tyre and rim dimensions. Consult an author- 3. Drive the car at least at 40 km/h in total for ised Volvo workshop at least 1 minute and check that the mes- Adjusting tyre pressure monitoring sage disappears. Tyre pressure monitoring can be adjusted in Tyre pressure monitoring, TPMS * order to follow Volvo's tyre pressure recom- TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) mendations, when driving with a heavy load for warns the driver when the pressure is too low example. in one or more of the car's tyres. It uses sensors located inside the air valve in each wheel.

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 252 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

Deactivating/activating tyre pressure • Volvo recommends that sensors are not WARNING monitoring moved between different wheels. SST tyres should only be fitted by individu- als with expertise on SST tyres. NOTE WARNING SST tyres must only be fitted together with The engine must not be running. When inflating a tyre equipped with TPMS, TPMS. hold the nozzle of the pump directly against the valve to avoid damaging the valve. After a fault message on low tyre pressure Settings are made in the controls in the centre has been shown, do not drive faster than console, see page 118. 80 km/h. 1. Select key position I or II . Driveable punctured tyres * Maximum driving distance to tyre change is If Self Supporting run flat Tyres (SST) have 80 km. 2. Select Car settings Tyre pressure been selected then the car is also equipped Avoid hard driving. with TPMS. 3. Select Tyre pressure system and press SST tyres must be replaced if they are dam- ENTER . This type of tyre has a specially reinforced side aged or punctured. > A X is shown in the display if the system wall that makes continued driving possible is activated, the option disappears if the despite the tyre losing some air. These tyres system is deactivated. are fitted on a special rim. (Normal tyres can Tools also be fitted to this rim). Recommendations If an SST tyre loses tyre pressure then the yel- 06 Only factory fitted wheels are equipped with low TPMS lamp on the instrument panel illu- TPMS sensors in the valves. minates and a message is shown in the text • The temporary spare wheel does not have panel. If this occurs, reduce speed to this sensor. max. 80 km/h. The tyre must be replaced as • If wheels without TPMS sensors are used soon as possible. then TYRE PRESS SYST SERVICE Drive carefully, in some cases it can be difficult REQUIRED will be shown every time the to see which tyre is faulty. In order to establish 2 4

car is driven faster than 40 km/h for more 4 5

which tyre needs attention, check all four tyres. 2 0 than 10 minutes. G • Volvo recommends that TPMS sensors are fitted to all wheels on the car.

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 253 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

A foam block, located in the spare wheel rim, The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel The tools and jack must be returned to their contains all tools. The tools consist of a towing well with the outside down. Two foam blocks, correct places after use. The jack must be eye, jack* and wheel wrench. The foam block one under the spare wheel and one over/inside cranked to the correct position in order to have is screwed into a bracket in the bottom of the affix the spare wheel in position. The upper one space. spare wheel well. contains all tools. The foam block and spare wheel must be Jack * The same bolt runs through to secure the spare replaced in the reverse order to taking out. wheel and the foam blocks. The original jack should only be used for Note that there is an arrow on the upper foam changing wheels. The jack's thread must Taking out the spare wheel block. It must point forwards in the car. always be well greased. 1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward. IMPORTANT 2. Undo the retaining screw. Spare wheel * Tools and jack must be stored in the The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only 3. Lift out the foam block with its tools. intended location in the car's cargo area intended for temporary use. Replace the spare 4. Lift out the spare wheel. when not in use. wheel with a normal wheel as soon as possible. The lower block does not need to be lifted out. The car's handling may be altered by the use NOTE of the spare wheel. The correct tyre pressure Tools - returning into place for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pres- If the floor hatch is not closed then privacy sure table, see page 260. locking does not work, see page 45. 06 IMPORTANT Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare wheel on the car.

IMPORTANT 6

The car must never be driven fitted with 3 3 9 2 0

more than one temporary spare wheel. G

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 254 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels NOTE WARNING Removing Use the jack belonging to the car. Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jacking point and the jack. 2. Take out the spare wheel, jack and wheel wrench that are located under the carpet in the cargo area. 6. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess in the plastic 3. Place chocks in front of and behind the cover at each point. Crank the foot of the wheels which will remain on the ground. jack down so it is pressed squarely on the Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones. ground. Check that the jack sits in the anchorage as illustrated and that the foot is positioned vertically under the anchor- 4 3 5 4

2 age. 0 G 7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Mounting points Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the Set up the warning triangle, see page 213 if a wheel. wheel must be replaced at a busy location. The car and jack* must be on a firm horizontal sur- Installation 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel 06 face. and hub. 9 7 7

1. Apply the parking brake and engage first 1 2 0 gear, or position P if the car has an auto- G 2. Put on the wheel. Screw in the wheel bolts. matic gearbox. 3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot 4. (For cars with steel rims.) Prize off the rotate. WARNING wheel cover with the end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by hand. Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it 5. Loosen the wheel nuts ½–1 turn anticlock- is free from dirt. wise with the wheel wrench.

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 255 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

WARNING must be replaced before its expiration date and after use. Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack. The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread. Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. NOTE Park the car so that passengers have the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between The emergency puncture repair kit is only them and the road. intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread. 0 8 7 1 2 0 G Emergency puncture repair * The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in 4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency important that the wheel bolts are tight- puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, ened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check cracks or similar damage. the torque with a torque wrench. 12 V sockets for the compressor are located by 5. Fit on the wheel cover (for cars with steel the centre console in the front, by the rear seat rims). and in the cargo area. Choose the electrical socket that is nearest the punctured tyre. 06 NOTE 9

0 Taking out the emergency puncture 3

The hubcap outlet for the valve must be 3 2 0 located over the valve on the rim when fit- G repair kit ted. Set up the warning triangle adjacent to a traf- General ficked location. The emergency puncture repair kit is located under the floor in the cargo The emergency puncture repair kit is used to area. seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor 1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward. and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as 2. Unscrew the retaining screw. a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 256 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

3. Lift away the foam block holding the jack Overview Air hose and wheel wrench. Sealing fluid bottle 4. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit. Pressure gauge Replace the parts after use. Gloves* WARNING Sealing punctured tyres You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. The temporarily sealed tyre must be changed as soon as possible (maximum driving distance: 200 km). 7

06 3 3 4 1 0 G

Label, maximum permitted speed Switch Cable 8 3 3 4 1 0 Bottle holder (orange cap) G Protective cap For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration. Pressure reducing valve

256 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 257 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture WARNING WARNING repair kit. Do not leave children in the car without If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole 2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted supervision when the engine is running. in the tyre is too big. The journey should not speed and affix it to the steering wheel. be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre. 7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and WARNING start the car. The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the 10. Switch off the compressor to check the case of contact with skin, wash away the WARNING pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum fluid with soap and water. pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is Never stand next to the tyre when the com- 3.5 bar. pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness 3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and arise then the compressor must be 11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the locate the cable and the air hose. switched off immediately. The journey cable from the 12 V socket. should not be continued. Contact an authorised tyre centre. 12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit NOTE the valve cap. Do not break the bottle seal. The seal is bro- 13. As soon as possible, drive approximately NOTE ken when the bottle is screwed in. 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so When the compressor starts, the pressure that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre. 4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure 06 bottle's stopper. drops after approximately 30seconds. Inflating the tyres The car's original tyres can be inflated by the WARNING 8. Flick the switch to position I. compressor. Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped 1. The compressor must be switched off. with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. IMPORTANT Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and air hose. Risk of overheating. The compressor must 5. Screw the bottle into its holder. not run for more than 10 minutes. 2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot- 6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. in the air hose valve connection to the bot- 9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes. tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

257 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 258 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

WARNING Rechecking the repair and pressure WARNING 1. Reconnect the equipment. Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in Check the tyre pressure regularly. danger to life. Never leave the engine run- 2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- gauge. ficient ventilation. Drive to the nearest authorised Volvo work- • If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is shop for the replacement/repair of the dam- insufficiently sealed. The journey should aged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre WARNING not be continued. Contact a tyre centre. contains sealing fluid. Do not leave children in the car without • If the tyre pressure is higher than supervision when the engine is running. 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the WARNING pressure specified on the tyre pressure decal. Release air using the pressure You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been 3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too sockets and start the car. used. Contact an authorised Volvo work- high. shop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maxi- 4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch mum driving distance is 200 km). The staff to position I. WARNING there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced. Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped IMPORTANT with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. Risk of overheating. The compressor must Replacing the sealing fluid canister 06 not run for more than 10 minutes. 3. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air Replace the bottle when the expiration date hose and cable. Refit the dust cap. has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste. 5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on 4. Return the emergency puncture repair kit the tyre pressure decal, (release air using to the cargo area. the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.) NOTE 6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be hose and cable. replaced after use. Replacement must be 7. Refit the dust cap. performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

258 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 259 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

WARNING 94 Tyre load index NOTE

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural W Speed rating for maximum permitted It is the maximum permitted speed that is rubber-latex. stated in the table. speed (in this case 270 km/h). Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact. Speed ratings Tyre pressure Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. The car is approved as a whole, which means Store out of the reach of children. that dimensions and speed ratings must not differ from those specified on the car's registration document. NOTE The only exception to these conditions is win- Leave the container at a collection point for ter tyres (both those with metal studs and those storing dangerous waste. without). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre. (For example, class Q can be driven at a

Specifications 0 3

maximum of 160 km/h). 8 1 2 0 Designation of dimensions Traffic regulations determine how fast a car G The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres. Example of designation: The tyre pressure decal on the driver's side door pillar (between front and rear door) shows 06 225/50R17 94 W. Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres) which pressures the tyres should have at dif- T 190 km/h ferent loads and speed conditions, this is also 225 Section width (mm) specified in the tyre pressure table, see below. H 210 km/h 50 Ratio between section height and • Tyre pressure for the car's recommended width (%) V 240 km/h wheel dimension • ECO pressure R Radial ply W 270 km/h • Spare wheel pressure (Temporary Spare) 17 Rim diameter in inches (") Y 300 km/h

259 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 260 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

NOTE Temperature differences change tyre pressure.

Recommended tyre pressure Variant Tyre size Speed Load, 1 - 3 persons without Load, 1 - Max. load ECO pres- V70 (km/h) TPMS 3 persons sure A with TPMS Front (kPa) B Rear (kPa) Front/ Front Rear (kPa) Front/rear rear (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) 6-cyl. 225/55 R 16 0 – 160 230 210 230 260 260 260

225/50 R 17 160 + 280 280 280 300 300 - 245/45 R 17

245/40 R 18 0 – 160 230 210 230 260 260 260 06 160 + 270 270 270 290 290 -

5-cyl. diesel 225/55 R 16 0 – 160 220 210 220 260 260 260

185 hp 225/50 R 17, 160 + 260 260 260 270 270 - 245/45 R 17

245/40 R 18 0 – 160 230 210 230 260 260 260

160 + 260 260 260 270 270 -

260 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 261 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

Variant Tyre size Speed Load, 1 - 3 persons without Load, 1 - Max. load ECO pres- V70 (km/h) TPMS 3 persons sure A with TPMS Front (kPa) B Rear (kPa) Front/ Front Rear (kPa) Front/rear rear (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) 4-cyl. diesel 225/55 R 16 0 – 160 220 210 220 260 260 260

5-cyl. diesel 225/50 R 17 160 + 260 260 260 270 270 - 163 hp 245/45 R 17

4-cyl./5-cyl. 245/40 R 18 0 – 160 230 210 230 260 260 260 petrol 160 + 260 260 260 270 270 - 4-cyl./5-cyl. 205/60 R 16 0 – 160 230 210 230 260 260 260 Flexifuel 160 + 270 270 270 290 290 -

Spare T 125/80 R 17 max. 80 420 420 420 420 420 - 06 wheel C

A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. C Temporary spare.

261 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 262 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Wheels and tyres

Variant Tyre size Speed Load, 1 – 3 persons Max. load ECO pressure A XC70 (km/h) Front (kPa) B Rear (kPa) Front Rear (kPa) Front/rear (kPa) (kPa) 6-cyl., 5-cyl. 215/65 R 16 0 – 160 230 230 260 260 260

235/55 R 17 160 + 240 240 280 280 - 235/50 R 18 235/45 R 19

Spare T 125/80 R 17 max. 80 420 420 420 420 - wheel C

A Economical driving. B In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. C Temporary spare.

Fuel economy, ECO pressure Inadequate tyre pressure increases fuel con- At speeds under 160 km/h, the general tyre sumption, shortens tyre lifespan and impairs pressure for full load is recommended in order the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre 06 to obtain optimum fuel economy. pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pres- Checking the tyre pressure sure affects travelling comfort, road noise and The tyre pressures must be checked every steering characteristics. month. This also applies to the car's spare wheel. After several few kilometres of driving, NOTE the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. Check tyre pressures on cold tyres. "Cold Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera- natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature. ture as the ambient temperature.

262 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 263 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

Washing the car IMPORTANT everywhere. Handwashing the car is recom- Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. mended for achieving optimum results. Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for Use car shampoo. example. NOTE • Remove bird droppings from the paintwork During the first few months a new car must only be handwashed. This is because the as soon as possible. Bird droppings con- NOTE tain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork is more sensitive when it is new. paintwork very quickly. An authorised Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog Volvo workshop is recommended for the lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have Testing the brakes removal of any discoloration. condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting • Hose down the underbody. If using a pres- is designed to withstand this. Condensation WARNING sure washer, keep the nozzle at least 30 cm is normally vented out of the lamp housing Always test the brakes after washing the from the painted surfaces. when it has been switched on for a time. car, including the parking brake, to ensure • Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. that moisture and corrosion do not attack Do not spray directly onto the locks. Cleaning the wiper blades the brake linings and reduce braking per- • Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, formance. plenty of lukewarm water. as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, • Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm impair the service life of wiper blades. Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then soap solution or car shampoo. when driving long distances in rain or slush. 06 • Use cold degreasing agent on very dirty NOTE The heat from the friction causes the brake lin- surfaces. ings to warm up and dry. Do the same thing Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- after starting in very damp or cold weather. • Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car a water scraper. shampoo. Exterior plastic, rubber and trim Do not use any strong solvents. components WARNING A special cleaning agent available from Volvo Always have the engine cleaned by a work- Automatic car washes dealers is recommended for cleaning coloured shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is An automatic car wash is a simple and quick plastic parts, rubber and trim components, hot. way of washing the car, but it cannot reach such as glossy trim mouldings. When using

263 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 264 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

such a cleaning agent the instructions must be using fine rubbing paste designed for car paint- ties. This should be used first after three years followed carefully. work. and then each year. Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq- IMPORTANT uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the Rustproofing – inspection and Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and packaging carefully. Many preparations con- maintenance rubber. tain both polish and wax. The car received a thorough and complete Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body away or damage the glossy surface. IMPORTANT are made of galvanised sheet metal. The Polishing agent that contains abrasive must Paint treatment such as preserving, sealing, underbody is protected by a wear-resistant not be used. protection, lustre sealing or similar could anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the caused by such treatments is not covered exposed members, cavities, closed sections Rims by Volvo warranty. and side doors. Only use cleaning agent recommended by Volvo. Strong rim cleaning agents can damage Under normal conditions the rustproofing does the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated Cleaning front side windows that have not require treatment for approximately 12 aluminium rims. a water-repellent surface * years. After this period, it should be treated at three-year intervals. Please contact an author- Never use products such as car wax, ised Volvo workshop if the car needs further Polishing and waxing degreaser or similar on glass surfa- 06 treatment. Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull ces as this could ruin their water-repellent or to give the paintwork extra protection. properties. Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it is important to keep the car clean. The car's rust- Take care when cleaning so as not to damage The car does not need to be polished until it is proofing needs to be checked regularly and the glass surface. at least one year old. However, the car can be touched-up if necessary in order for it to be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax To avoid damaging glass surfaces when maintained. the car in direct sunlight. removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers. Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you There is natural wear of the water-repellent begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt coating. and tar stains using Volvo tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended in order to maintain the water-repellent proper-

264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 265 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

Cleaning the interior accordance with the instructions, preserves 3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- the leather's protective coating. After a period stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly of use the natural appearance of the leather will stain. Do not rub. nevertheless emerge, depending more or less and follow the instructions included with the 4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and on the surface texture of the leather. This is a car care product. allow the leather to dry completely. natural maturing of the leather and shows that Stains on fabric upholstery and roof it is a natural product. Protective treatment of leather upholstery upholstery To achieve best results Volvo recommends 1. Pour a small amount of the protective A special fabric cleaning agent, available from cleaning and application of the protective cream on the felted cloth and massage in authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to cream once to four times per year (or more if a thin layer of cream with gentle circular avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of required). Ask a Volvo dealer about Volvo's movements on the leather. the upholstery. Use water and a synthetic Leather care product. detergent to clean the seatbelts. Make sure the 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract. IMPORTANT before use. IMPORTANT Never use strong solvents. Such products The leather has now been given improved pro- may damage fabric, vinyl and leather tection against stains and improved UV pro- Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the upholstery. tection. fabric upholstery. Treating stains on interior plastic, metal IMPORTANT 06 Treating stains on leather upholstery and wood parts Volvo leather upholstery is chromium-free and Note that materials with colour that runs A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly approved in accordance with the Oeko-Tex when dry (new jeans, suede garments etc.) moistened with water, available from Volvo 100 standard. may discolour the upholstery material. dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces. The leather is refined and processed so that it Washing instructions for leather retains its natural characteristics. It is given a Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong protective coating, but regular cleaning is upholstery stain removers. A special cleaning agent avail- required in order to maintain both characteris- 1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened able from Volvo dealers can be used for more tics and appearance. Volvo offers a compre- sponge and squeeze out a strong foam. difficult cleaning. hensive product for the cleaning and treatment 2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular of leather upholstery which, when used in movements.

265 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 266 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Car care

Carpets and cargo area Colour code Before work is begun, the car must be clean Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of and dry and at a temperature above 15 °C. the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint. Touching up paintwork 2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine Paint is an important part of the car's rust- brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a proofing and should therefore be checked reg- brush once the primer is dry. ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. The 3. For scratches, proceed as above, but

1 mask around the damaged area to protect 3

most common types of paintwork damage are 8 1 2 0 the undamaged paintwork. stone chips, scratches, and marks on the G edges of wings and doors. 4. After a few days, polish the touched-up It is important that the exact correct colour is areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount Materials used. The product decal specifies the car's of lapping paste. • primer in a can colour code, see page 267. • paint in a can or touch-up pen NOTE Repairing stone chips • brush If the stone chip has not penetrated to the 06 • masking tape bare metal and there is an undamaged colour coat, you can paint straight after cleaning the damaged surface. 2 3 8 1 2 0 G

266 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 267 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Type designations

Decal location

06 7 8 0 2 3 0 G

267 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 268 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Type designations

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories. Type designation, vehicle identification number, maximum permissible weights, codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number. Label for parking heater. The engine oil decal specifies oil grade and viscosity. Engine type designation, component and serial number. Gearbox type designation and serial number. Manual gearbox 06 Automatic gearbox Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle Identification Number). Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

268 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 269 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Dimensions 4 0 4 7 1 0 G

V70.

Posi- Dimensions mm Posi- Dimensions mm tion in tion in 06 illus- illus- tration tration A Wheelbase 2816 F Front track 1578

B Length 4823 G Rear track 1576

C Load length, floor, 1878 H Width 1861 folded seat I Width including door 2106 D Load length, floor 1089 mirrors

E Height 1547 ``

269 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 270 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications 5 0 4 7 1 0 G

XC70.

Posi- Dimensions mm Posi- Dimensions mm Weights tion in tion in Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 06 illus- illus- 90% full and all fluids. The weight of passen- tration tration gers and accessories, such as a towbar, load carriers, space box etc. and towball load (when A Wheelbase 2815 F Front track 1604 a trailer is hitched, see table) influences the payload and must not be included in the kerb B Length 4838 G Rear track 1570 weight. Permitted weight (in addition to driver) C Load length, floor, 1878 H Width 1861 = Gross vehicle weight – Kerb weight. folded seat I Width including door 2119 D Load length, floor 1089 mirrors

E Height 1604

270 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 271 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

WARNING Max. front axle load The car's driving characteristics change Max. rear axle load depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed. Equipment level Max. load: See registration document. Max. roof load: 100 kg. 5 5 7 7 1 0 G

For information on decal location, see page 267 .

Gross vehicle weight 06 Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Towing capacity and towball load Model Gearbox Trailer weight with brake (kg) Towball load (kg) All All 0 – 1200 50

2.0 MTX75 max. 1500 75

271 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 272 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Model Gearbox Trailer weight with brake (kg) Towball load (kg) 2.0F MTX75 max. 1500 75

2.5FT Manual (M66) max. 1600 75

2.5FT Automatic (TF-80SC) max. 1800 75

2.5T Manual (M66) max. 1800 75

2.5T Automatic (TF-80SC) max. 1800 75

3.2 Automatic (TF-80SC) max. 1800 75

T6 Automatic (TF–80SC) AWD max. 2000 90

2.0D MMT6 max. 1600 75

2.4D Manual (M66) V70 max. 1800 75

2.4D Automatic (TF-80SC) V70 max. 1800 75

2.4D Manual AWD XC70 max. 2100 90 06 2.4D Automatic AWD XC70 max. 2100 90

D5 Manual (M66) V70 max. 1800 75

D5 Automatic (TF-80SC) V70 max. 2000 90

272 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 273 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Model Gearbox Trailer weight with brake (kg) Towball load (kg) D5 Manual AWD V70 max. 1800 V70 75 XC70 max. 2100 XC70 90

D5 Automatic AWD V70 max. 2000 90 XC70 max. 2100

Trailer weight Towball load (kg) NOTE without brake The use of stabilising devices is recom- (kg) mended with trailers heavier than 1800 kg. max. 750 50

Engine specifications Specification/ 2.0F 2.0 2.5T A 3.2 T6 2.5FT 06 Model Engine designation B4204S4 B4204S3 B5254T6 B5254T8 B6324S B6304T2

Output (kW/rpm) 107/6000 107/6000 147/4800 147/4800 175/6200 210/5600

Output (hp/rpm) 145/6000 145/6000 200/4800 200/4800 238/6200 285/5600

Torque (Nm/rpm) 190/4500 190/4500 300/1500 – 4500 300/1500 – 4500 320/3200 400/1500 – 4800

No. of cylinders 4 4 5 5 6 6

Bore (mm) 87 87 83 83 84 82

273 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 274 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Specification/ 2.0F 2.0 2.5T 2.5FT A 3.2 T6 Model Stroke (mm) 83.0 83.0 93.2 93.2 96 93.2

Swept volume (litres) 1.99 1.99 2.521 2.521 3.192 2.953

Compression ratio 10.8:1 10.8:1 9.0:1 9.0:1 10.8:1 9.3:1

A Only V70.

Specification/Model 2.0D 2.4D D5 Engine designation D4204T D5244T5 D5244T4

Output (kW/rpm) 100/4000 120/4000 136/4000

Output (hp/rpm) 136/4000 163/4000 185/4000

Torque (Nm/rpm) 320/2000 340/1750 – 2750 400/2000 – 2750

No. of cylinders 4 5 5 06 Bore (mm) 85 81 81

Stroke (mm) 88.0 93.1 93.1

Swept volume (litres) 2.00 2.400 2.400

Compression ratio 18.5:1 17.3:1 17.3:1

274 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 275 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Engine oil Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection Adverse driving conditions for the engine. Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Volvo recommends Castrol oil products. Check the oil level more frequently for long IMPORTANT journeys: In order to fulfil the requirements for the • towing a caravan or trailer. engine's service intervals all engines are • in mountainous regions. filled with a specially adapted synthetic 4 3 8

engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil 1 2 at high speeds. 0 • has been made very carefully with regard to G • in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hot- service life, starting characteristics, fuel ter than +40 °C consumption and environmental impact. An Viscosity chart approved engine oil must be used in order • shorter driving distances (shorter than 10 that the recommended service intervals can km) at low temperatures (under 5 °C). be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of This can produce abnormally high oil tempera- oil (see the engine compartment decal) for ture or oil consumption. both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. Volvo Car Corporation dis- 06 claims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

275 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 276 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Oil decal Engine variant Filling volume between MIN– Volume A MAX (litres) (litres) 2.0D D4204T 2.0 5.5 9 7 0 2 3 0 G

The following applies when this adjacent oil decal is fitted in the car's engine compartment. For location see page 226. Oil grade: WSS-M2C913-B Viscosity: SAE 5W–30 06 When driving under adverse conditions, use ACEA A5/B5 SAE 0W-30.

A Including filter change

276 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 277 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Oil decal Engine variant Volume between MIN and Volume MAX (litres) (litres) 2.0F B4204S4 0.75 4.3

2.0 B4204S3 0.75 4.3

2.5FT B5254T8 1.3 5.5

2.5T B5254T6 1.3 5.5 8 7 0

2 3.2 B6324S 1.2 7.4 3 0 G T6 B6304T2 1.2 7.4 The following applies when the adjacent decal D5 D5244T4 1.5 6.0 is fitted in the car's engine compartment. For information on decal location, see page 226. 2.4D D5244T5 1.5 6.0 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5 Viscosity: SAE 0W–30 06

Other fluids and lubricants Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade Gearbox oil Manual (M66) 2.0 Transmission fluid: MTF 97309

Gearbox oil Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.0 Transmission fluid JWS 3309

Gearbox oil MMT6 1.7 Transmission fluid: BOT 130

Gearbox oil MTX75 1.9 Transmission fluid: BOT 130

277 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 278 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Fluid System Volume (litres) Prescribed grade Coolant Petrol engine 2.0 7.55 Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with water A, see packaging. Petrol engine 2.0F 7.55

Petrol engine 2.5FT B 9.0

Petrol engine 3.2 8.9

Petrol engine 2.5T 9.0

Petrol engine T6 8.9

Diesel engine 2.0D 9.15

Diesel engine D5/2,4D 12.65

Air conditioning C - - Oil: PAG Refrigerant: R134a (HFC134a)

Brake fluid - 0.6 DOT 4+ 06 Power steering - 1.2 Power steering fluid WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.

Washer fluid - 6.5 Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with 4.5 D water.

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Only V70. C May vary depending on the engine variant. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the exact information. D Cars without headlamp washing

278 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 279 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

NOTE Under normal driving conditions the gearbox oil does not need changing during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions, see page 275.

Consumption, emissions and volume Emissions of car- Consumption Tank volume Model Engine Gearbox bon dioxide(CO , (litre/100 km ) 2 (litres) g/km ) 2.0 Manual 5-speed 8.6 206 approx. 70 B4204S3 (MTX75)

2.0F A B4204S4 Manual 5-speed 8.6 206 approx. 70 (MTX75)

2.5FT A Manual (M66) 9.2 220 approx. 70 06 (Environmental car B5254T8 Sweden)

2.5FT A B5254T8 Automatic (TF-80SC) 10.2 243 approx. 70 (Environmental car Sweden)

2.5FT A B5254T8 Manual (M66) 9.4 224 approx. 70

2.5FT A B5254T8 Automatic (TF-80SC) 10.4 247 approx. 70

279 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 280 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Emissions of car- Consumption Tank volume Model Engine Gearbox bon dioxide(CO , (litre/100 km ) 2 (litres) g/km ) 2.5T B5254T6 Manual (M66) 9.5 227 approx. 70

2.5T B5254T6 Automatic (TF-80SC) 10.2 243 approx. 70

3.2 B6324S Automatic (TF-80SC) 10.5 251 approx. 70

3.2 B6324S Automatic (TF–80SC) V70 11.5 V70 275 approx. 70 AWD XC70 11.4 XC70 272

T6 B6304T2 Automatic (TF–80SC) 11.3 270 approx. 70 AWD

2.0D D4204T MMT6 5.9 157 approx. 70

D5 D5244T4 Manual (M66) 6.7 178 approx. 70

D5 D5244T4 Automatic (TF-80SC) 7.7 203 approx. 70 06 D5 D5244T4 Manual (M66) AWD V70 7.3 V70 194 approx. 70 XC70 7.5 XC70 199

D5 D5244T4 Automatic (TF–80SC) V70 8.1 V70 214 approx. 70 AWD XC70 8.3 XC70 219

280 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 281 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Specifications

Emissions of car- Consumption Tank volume Model Engine Gearbox bon dioxide(CO , (litre/100 km ) 2 (litres) g/km ) 2.4D D5244T5 Manual (M66) V70 6.7 V70 178 approx. 70 XC70 7.5 XC70 199

2.4D D5244T5 Automatic (TF-80SC) V70 7.7 V70 203 approx. 70 XC70 8.3 XC70 219

A Flexifuel can be driven on any 95 octane unleaded petrol, or bioethanol E85, as well as all possible mixtures of these two fuels. The car consumes approx. 40% more E85 which has a lower energy content.

Fuel consumption and emissions of Electrical system IMPORTANT carbon dioxide 12 volt system with a voltage-regulated alter- If the battery is replaced, replace it with a Official fuel consumption figures are based on nator. Single pole system in which the chassis battery of the same cold start capacity and a standard driving cycle in accordance with EU and engine block are used as conductors. The reserve capacity as the original (see the Directive 80/1268comb. negative terminal is connected to the chassis. decal on the battery). The manner in which the car is driven, and other non-technical factors affect fuel con- 06 sumption. For more information, see page 9.

Performance, battery Engine 2.5T, 2.5FT 2.0, 2.0F, 3.0T, 3.2 2.0D, D5, 2.4D

Voltage (V) 12 12 12

Cold start capacity (A) 520 – 800 520 – 700 700

Reserve capacity (min) 100 – 150 100 – 135 135

281 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 282 henrikrosenqvist

06 Maintenance and specifications

Type approval

Remote control system Country A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK, E, EST, F, FIN, GB, A GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT, LV, M, NL, P, PL, S, SK, SLO

IS, LI, N, CH

ROK Delphi 2003-07-15, Germany R- LPD1-03-0151

CCAB06LP1940T4

A Delphi hereby certifies that this remote control system con- forms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.

282 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 283 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

A Air distribution...... 124, 129 Audio volume Air vents ...... 125 phone ...... 190 ACC – Adaptive cruise control...... 158 phone/media player ...... 190 Alarm...... 56 ring signal, phone ...... 190 Active Bi-Xenon Lights ...... 78 alarm indicator ...... 56 Active chassis – FOUR-C ...... 156 alarm signals ...... 56 AUTO climate control settings ...... 127 Adaptation ...... 98 arming ...... 56 checking the alarm ...... 42 Automatic car washes ...... 263 Adapting driving characteristics ...... 156 deactivating ...... 56 Automatic gearbox ...... 101 Adaptive cruise control ...... 158 deactivating a triggered alarm ...... 56 manual gear positions (Geartronic).....101 fault tracing ...... 162 reduced alarm level ...... 57 towing and recovery ...... 219 radar sensor...... 161 temporary disarming of the alarm ...... 57 Automatic locking ...... 50 Adaptive cruise control fault tracing ...... 162 testing the alarm system ...... 57 Automatic relocking ...... 50 Additional heater ...... 134 Allergy and asthma inducing sub- AUX ...... 135 Additional heater (Diesel) ...... 134 stances...... 124 AWD, All-wheel drive ...... 104 Adjusting headlamp pattern ...... 82 All-wheel drive, AWD ...... 104 Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ...... 82 All Wheel Drive (AWD) ...... 104 Bi-Xenon headlamp ...... 82 Approach light, duration ...... 82 Halogen headlamp ...... 83 B Audio Adjusting the steering wheel...... 76 headphones socket ...... 136 Backrest ...... 72 Airbag rear control panel...... 136 front seat, lowering ...... 72 07 activating/deactivating, PACOS ...... 20 settings ...... 137 Backrest rear seat, lowering ...... 74 deactivating/activating ...... 20 surround ...... 135 Battery ...... 238 driver's and front passenger side ...... 18 Audio system ...... 135 maintenance ...... 238 Air conditioning ...... 127 functions ...... 137 remote control key/PCC ...... 46 general ...... 123 overview...... 135 start assistance...... 99 Air conditioning, AC ...... 127

283 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 284 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

symbols on the battery ...... 238 C Checking and topping up the coolant ..... 227 warning symbols...... 238 Children ...... 29 Bioethanol E85...... 204 Calls child safety locks ...... 34 functions during a call ...... 193, 194 Blind spot (BLIS) ...... 181 child seats and side airbags ...... 22 incoming ...... 189, 193 location in the car ...... 29 Blind Spot Information System, BLIS ...... 181 operation...... 189, 193 safety ...... 29 Bluetooth volume in phone ...... 194 Child safety locks ...... 55 handsfree ...... 188 waiting ...... 194 Child seat ...... 29 mute microphone ...... 190 Call waiting ...... 194 transfer call to mobile ...... 190 Child seats ...... 29 Camera sensor ...... 169 Bonnet, opening ...... 224 integrated two-stage booster cushion.32 Car care ...... 263 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats ... 34 Brake and clutch fluid ...... 227 Car care, leather upholstery ...... 265 recommended ...... 30 Brake light ...... 79 Cargo area size classes for child seats with the ISO- Brakes ...... 105 cargo cover ...... 211 FIX fixture system ...... 34 Anti-lock braking system, ABS ...... 105 lighting ...... 81 upper mounting points for child seats .. 36 brake light ...... 79 mounting points ...... 206 Cigarette lighter socket...... 186 brake system ...... 105 safety grille...... 209 front seat...... 187 electric parking brake ...... 109 safety net ...... 210 rear seat ...... 187 Emergency brake assistance, EBA.....105 Cargo cover ...... 211 Cleaning emergency brake light, EBL ...... 79 automatic car washes...... 263 07 filling brake fluid...... 228 Car upholstery ...... 265 car wash ...... 263 symbols in the combined instrument Car wash ...... 263 rims ...... 264 panel ...... 105 Catalytic converter ...... 203 seatbelts ...... 265 Built-in phone ...... 193 recovery ...... 219 upholstery ...... 265 Bulbs, see Lighting ...... 229 Centre console...... 118 Clean Zone Interior ...... 124 Chassis settings...... 156

284 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 285 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

Climate control ...... 123 D Driving with a trailer general ...... 123 towball load ...... 270 sensors ...... 123 Deadlocks ...... 53 towing capacity ...... 270 Clock, setting ...... 69 deactivation ...... 53 DSTC, see also Stability control system..155 temporary deactivation ...... 53 Collision ...... 28 Defroster ...... 128 Collision warning ...... 167 Diesel ...... 204 E Collision warning system Diesel particle filter ...... 205 radar sensor...... 161, 167 ECC, electronic climate control ...... 126 Direction indicators ...... 80 Collision Warning with Auto Brake* ...... 167 Economical driving ...... 200 Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor ... 103 Colour code, paint ...... 266 ECO pressure ...... 259 Display lighting ...... 77 Combined instrument panel ...... 120 Electrical socket Comfort inside the passenger compart- Distance Alert ...... 164 cargo area...... 187 ment ...... 185 Dolby Surround Pro Logic II ...... 135 front seat...... 187 Compass...... 154 Door mirrors ...... 90 rear seat ...... 187 calibration ...... 154 Driveable punctured tyres...... 252 Electric parking brake ...... 109 setting the zone ...... 154 low battery voltage ...... 109 Driver Alert Control ...... 172 Condensation in headlamps ...... 263 releasing automatically ...... 110 Driver Alert System ...... 172 releasing manually ...... 110 Controls Driving ...... 200 centre console ...... 118 Emergency calls...... 193 cooling system...... 200 07 Emergency equipment Crash, see Collision ...... 28 with the tailgate open ...... 200 warning triangle ...... 213 Cruise control ...... 157 with trailer ...... 214 Emergency puncture repair ...... 255 Driving in water ...... 200 Emissions of carbon dioxide ...... 205

285 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 286 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

Engine F general ...... 241 overheating ...... 214 relay/fuse box in engine compart- starting ...... 95 Fan ...... 127 ment ...... 242 Engine block heater ...... 97 Fault tracing for the camera sensor ...... 170 Fuse table Engine braking, automatic ...... 107 First aid equipment ...... 213 fuses in cargo area ...... 247 fuses in engine compartment ...... 243 Engine compartment Flexifuel ...... 97 coolant ...... 227 adaptation...... 98 oil ...... 226 Floor mats ...... 186 overview...... 224 G Fog lamp power steering fluid ...... 228 front ...... 79 Gearbox ...... 100 Engine oil ...... 225, 275 Fog lamps automatic ...... 101 adverse driving conditions...... 275 rear...... 79 manual ...... 100 capacities ...... 275 Gear selector inhibitor ...... 103 filter ...... 226 Fog lamps, on/off...... 79 oil grade ...... 275 Foot brake...... 105 Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disen- gagement ...... 103 Error messages FOUR-C – Active chassis ...... 156 Geartronic ...... 101 Driver Alert Control ...... 173 Fuel ...... 203 Lane Departure Warning...... 176 fuel consumption ...... 205 Glass see Messages and symbols ...... 162 fuel economy ...... 259, 262 laminated/reinforced...... 89 Error messages in BLIS ...... 183 fuel filter ...... 205 Global opening ...... 123 07 Error messages in Distance Alert ...... 165 Fuse box ...... 241 Glovebox...... 186 Error messages in the Adaptive cruise con- glovebox ...... 245 Locking ...... 51 trol ...... 162 Fuses ...... 241 Gross vehicle weight ...... 270 Expectant mothers, seatbelt ...... 15 box in cargo area ...... 247 changing ...... 241 External dimensions ...... 269

286 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 287 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

H Hoot ...... 76 Interior rearview mirror...... 92 Horn ...... 76 automatic dimming ...... 92 Hazard warning flashers ...... 80 Intermittent wiping ...... 86 HBS – Heart Beat Sensor ...... 43 HDC ...... 107 I Headlamp levelling ...... 77 J IAQS – Interior Air Quality System ...... 124 Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ...... 77 Jack ...... 253 Bi-Xenon headlamps...... 77 IC – Inflatable Curtain ...... 24 Headlamp pattern, adjusting ...... 82 IDIS – Intelligent Driver Information Sys- tem ...... 195 Headlamps...... 229 K Ignition keys ...... 71 Headphones socket ...... 136 IMEI number ...... 196 Kerb weight...... 270 Head restraint centre seat, rear...... 74 Immobiliser ...... 40 Key ...... 40 lowering ...... 74 Indicator lamps, PCC...... 42 Key blade ...... 43 Heated washer nozzles...... 87 Information and warning symbols ...... 66 Keyless drive...... 48, 95 Heating ...... 127 Information button, PCC ...... 42 Keyless start (keyless drive)...... 48, 95 rearview and door mirrors ...... 91 Information displays ...... 65 Keylock ...... 103 rear window ...... 91 Instrument lighting, see Lighting...... 77 Keypad in the steering seats ...... 127 Instrument overview wheel...... 76, 118, 157, 193 07 High engine temperature ...... 214 left-hand drive...... 62 Key positions ...... 71 High-pressure headlamp washing ...... 87 right-hand drive ...... 64 Hill Descent Control ...... 107 Instruments and controls ...... 62 HomeLink EU ...... 112 Interior lighting, see Lighting ...... 80 Home safe lighting ...... 81

287 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 288 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

L fog lamp ...... 232 M Lamp housing, rear, direction indica- Laminated glass...... 89 tors...... 232 Main/dipped beam, see Lightning ...... 77 Lamps, see Lighting ...... 229 main beam Active Bi-Xenon ...... 231 Maintenance main beam Bi-Xenon ...... 231 Lane Departure Control ...... 175 rustproofing ...... 264 main beam halogen ...... 230 Making calls ...... 189, 193 Leather upholstery, washing instructions265 number plate lighting ...... 233 Lighting ...... 229 parking lamps ...... 231 Manual gearbox ...... 100 Active Bi-Xenon Lights, ABL ...... 78 side marker lamps ...... 232 towing and recovery ...... 219 approach light, duration ...... 82 vanity mirror ...... 234 Manual gear positions (Geartronic)...... 101 automatic lighting, passenger compart- Light switches ...... 77 Memory function in seats ...... 73 ment ...... 81 Loading Menus and messages ...... 118 bulbs, specifications ...... 234 cargo area...... 206 controls ...... 80 Messages and symbols general ...... 206 display lighting ...... 77 Collision Warning with Auto Brake ..... 170 mounting points ...... 206 front fog lamps ...... 79 Distance Alert ...... 165 roof load ...... 212 headlamp levelling ...... 77 Driver Alert Control ...... 173 home safe lighting ...... 81 Locking/unlocking Lane Departure Warning...... 176 in passenger compartment...... 80 inside ...... 50 Messages and symbols in the Adaptive instrument lighting ...... 77 tailgate ...... 41, 51 cruise control ...... 162 main/dipped beam ...... 77 Locks Messages in BLIS ...... 183 07 position/parking lamps ...... 78 automatic locking ...... 50 Messages in the combined instrument rear fog lamp ...... 79 Locking ...... 50 panel ...... 121 Lighting, bulb replacement ...... 229 unlocking ...... 50 Messages in the information display ...... 155 cargo area...... 234 courtesy lighting ...... 233 dipped beam halogen ...... 230 direction indicators ...... 231

288 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 289 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

Meters in the combined instrument panel Paintwork messages ...... 195 fuel gauge ...... 66 colour code ...... 266 on/off ...... 193 speedometer...... 66 damage and touch-up ...... 266 phone book...... 191 tachometer ...... 66 Panel lighting ...... 77 phone book, shortcut ...... 191 receiving a call ...... 190 Misting ...... 128 Panic function ...... 41 attending to the windows ...... 123 register phone...... 188 Parking assistance ...... 178 condensation in headlamps ...... 263 ring signal ...... 194 parking assistance sensors ...... 180 remove with the air vents ...... 129 SIM card ...... 196 timer function ...... 128 Parking brake ...... 109 Phone book ...... 195 Mobile phone Parking heater...... 131 Pinch protection, sunroof ...... 94 battery and fuel ...... 131 connect ...... 191 Polishing ...... 264 handsfree ...... 188 parking on a hill ...... 131 Position/parking lamps ...... 78 register phone...... 188 time setting ...... 132 Power seat ...... 72 MY KEY...... 136 Particle filter ...... 205 Passenger compartment ...... 185 Power sunroof ...... 93 Passenger compartment filter ...... 124 Power windows ...... 89 O PCC – Personal Car Communicator Privacy locking...... 45 functions ...... 41 Puncture, see Tyres ...... 253 Oil, see also Engine oil ...... 275 range ...... 42, 43 Putting calls on hold ...... 194 Oil level low ...... 226 Petrol grade ...... 203 Overheating ...... 214 07 Phone built-in, overview ...... 193 R connect ...... 191 P handsfree ...... 188 Radar sensor ...... 158 incoming calls ...... 189 limitations ...... 161 PACOS...... 20 making calls ...... 189 Rain sensor ...... 86 PACOS, switch ...... 20

289 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 290 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

Rear bulbs Remote control key...... 40 Seatbelt location ...... 233 battery...... 41 rear seat ...... 15 Rear control panel battery replacement...... 46 seatbelt tensioner ...... 16 audio system ...... 136 detachable key blade ...... 40 Seatbelt reminder ...... 15 functions ...... 41 Rearview and door mirrors Seatbelts ...... 14 range ...... 42 compass ...... 154 Seats ...... 72 Remote control system, type approval....282 door ...... 90 head restraints, rear...... 74 electrically retractable...... 91 Resetting the door mirrors ...... 91 heating ...... 127 heating ...... 91 Resetting the power windows ...... 90 lowering the front backrest ...... 72 interior ...... 92 Retractable power door mirrors...... 91 lowering the rear backrest ...... 74 Rear window, defrosting ...... 91 power seats ...... 72 Reverse gear inhibitor ...... 101 ventilated front seats ...... 126 Recirculation ...... 128 five-speed ...... 100 Securing loads (Loading) ...... 206 Recommendations during driving...... 200 Rims Recommended child seats, table ...... 30 cleaning ...... 264 Service programme ...... 224 Recovery ...... 220 Rustproofing ...... 264 Set time interval ...... 164 Refrigerant ...... 123 Side airbags ...... 22 Refuelling ...... 202 Signal input, external ...... 135 fuel cap ...... 202 S SIM card ...... 196 fuel filler flap, electrical opening ...... 202 Safety grille ...... 209 SIPS bag – decal ...... 23 07 fuel filler flap, manual opening ...... 202 SIPS bags ...... 22 refuelling ...... 202 Safety mode...... 28 Soot filter ...... 205 Relay/fuse box: see Fuses ...... 241 Safety net ...... 210 SOOT FILTER FULL ...... 205 Remote control Seat, see Seats ...... 72 programmable ...... 112 Spare wheel ...... 253 Temporary spare ...... 253 Remote control, see Remote control key .. 40

290 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 291 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

Spin control ...... 155 sunscreen ...... 94 Timer ...... 128 Spin control function ...... 155 ventilation position...... 93 Tools ...... 253 SRS AIRBAG...... 18, 19 Sunscreen, sunroof...... 94 Total airing function ...... 42, 123 SRS system ...... 17 Surround ...... 135 Towball switch ...... 20 Symbols ...... 155 installation...... 216 SST – Self Supporting run flat Tyres ...... 252 indicator symbols ...... 66 removal ...... 218 information symbols ...... 66 Stability and traction control system ...... 155 Towbar, see Towing equipment ...... 215 warning symbols...... 66 Stability system...... 155 Towing ...... 219 Symbols and messages towing eye ...... 219 Stains ...... 265 Collision Warning with Auto Brake ..... 170 Towing capacity...... 270 Start assistance ...... 99 Distance Alert ...... 165 Towing equipment ...... 215 Steering force, speed related ...... 156 Driver Alert Control ...... 173 Lane Departure Warning...... 176 specifications ...... 216 Steering force level, see Steering force ... 156 Symbols and messages in the Adaptive Towing eye...... 219 Steering lock ...... 96 cruise control ...... 162 TPMS – Tyre Pressure Monitoring ...... 251 Steering wheel ...... 76 Trailer ...... 214 keypad ...... 76, 118, 135, 157, 193 cable ...... 214 keypad, adaptive cruise control ...... 159 T driving with a trailer ...... 214 steering wheel adjustment...... 76 Transmission...... 100 Stone chips and scratches ...... 266 Tailgate ...... 52 Trip computer ...... 152 07 Storage spaces in the passenger compart- locking/unlocking...... 41, 51 ment ...... 185 open ...... 52 Trip meter ...... 69 Sunroof Temperature Type approved, remote control system...282 opening and closing ...... 93 actual temperature ...... 123 Type designation ...... 267 pinch protection...... 94 Temperature control ...... 127 Testing the alarm system...... 57

291 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 292 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

Tyres W Waxing ...... 264 direction of rotation ...... 249 Weights driving characteristics...... 249 Warning lamp kerb weight ...... 270 maintenance ...... 249 adaptive cruise control ...... 158 Wheels pressure ...... 259 collision warning system ...... 167 changing ...... 254 puncture repair ...... 255 stability and traction control system .. 155 installation...... 254 specifications ...... 259 Warning lamps rims ...... 250 speed ratings ...... 259 airbags SRS ...... 67 snow chains ...... 251 tread wear indicators ...... 250 alternator not charging ...... 67 spare wheel ...... 253 tyre pressure monitoring...... 251 fault in brake system ...... 67 Wheels and tyres ...... 249 winter tyres ...... 250 low oil pressure...... 67 parking brake applied ...... 67 Whiplash injury...... 25 seatbelt reminder ...... 67 Whiplash injury, WHIPS ...... 25 U warning ...... 67 WHIPS Warning sound child seat/booster cushion ...... 25 Unlocking collision warning system ...... 167 whiplash injury ...... 25 from the inside ...... 50 from the outside ...... 50 Warning symbol, AIRBAG system ...... 17 Windows, rearview and door mirrors ...... 89 Warning triangle ...... 213 Windscreen washing...... 87 Washer fluid, filling...... 237 Windscreen wipers ...... 86 V Washer nozzles, heated...... 87 rain sensor ...... 86 07 Winter driving ...... 201 Vanity mirror...... 81, 187 Washers rear window ...... 87 Winter tyres ...... 250 Ventilation ...... 124 washer fluid, filling ...... 237 Wiper blades ...... 236 Vibration damper ...... 215 windscreen ...... 87 changing ...... 236 Water and dirt-repellent coating ...... 89 cleaning ...... 237 Water-repellent surface, cleaning ...... 264

292 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 293 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

replacing, rear window ...... 237 service position...... 236 Wipers and washing ...... 86

293 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 294 henrikrosenqvist

07 Alphabetical Index

294 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 295 henrikrosenqvist

Notes

295 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:16:38+01:00; Page 296 henrikrosenqvist

Notes

296 V70/XC70 (Y285/Y381); 9; 3 2008-03-25T08:19:58+01:00; Page 1 henrikrosenqvist

Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dcIE&%%*(:c\a^h]!6I%-'%!Eg^ciZY^cHlZYZc!<iZWdg\'%%-!8deng^\]i'%%%"'%%-Kdakd8Vg8dgedgVi^dc